Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

This creates a new project based on the default template. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. By default. the user interface is labeled. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click . you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. In the steps that follow. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.In the following illustration. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition.

Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. place the cursor over the menu name.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Edit. To choose commands. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. click Toolbar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Then. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. and View. TIP For example. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. and click. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. While working in the drawing area. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. click the command name to start the command. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. notice a door type is specified. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands.

Within the drawing area. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. If you select the Door tool.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. For example. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First. if you intend to add a door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. notice the list of walls that are available. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

11 Click OK. containing buttons grouped by function. Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . immediately below the Type Selector.

The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. family category (doors. Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. 3D). windows). select Views (all). In the Project Browser. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. reports. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . and group name. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project. click the tab. and rename views. schedules. delete. families. families. and groups. To access the commands within a tab. elevations. walls. sheets. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views.

■ 13 In the Type Selector.■ ■ To open a view. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. The browser is dockable. click Cancel. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Wall. Do not click. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. double-click the name. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. After you create a browser organization scheme. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.

In the Status Bar. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. In this case. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. regarding selected components within a view. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. in conjunction with Tooltips. click Modify. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. The Status Bar also provides information. When you place the cursor over a component.In the bottom left corner of the window. It highlights when the cursor is over it." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help. 18 On the Design Bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. 20 Press TAB.

You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can use this tri-pane. Windows: From any window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Click the Help button. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. click Training Files. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. There are several tools that help you find information. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. click . and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. If there is no Help button displayed. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print.

and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 . NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 8 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 On the View toolbar. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).

and double-click 2nd Flr. and select the wall. roll the wheel to zoom the view. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. on the View toolbar. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. click . Small blue dots. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. bottoms. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Floor Plans. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. called drag controls. These are the drag controls. If you do not have a wheel mouse. When drawing or modifying a building model. press and hold CTRL. 14 Enter ZR. referred to as shape handles.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. Cnst. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. display along the ends. click Zoom. expand Views (all). and drag the cursor. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. Similar controls. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. On a wheel mouse. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and drag the cursor in the drawing area. Without clicking in the dialog. To modify or add snap increments.

In this case. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . click to specify the starting position. to lengthen the wall. such as Move and Copy. require two clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. Some commands. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. for example. and on the Edit toolbar.15 Click and drag the left control. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. click (Move). After selecting the element to be moved. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.

and drag it on top of the table.20 Click next to the lower wall. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 23 On the Undo menu. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this example. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the plant. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. click the drop-down menu next to . Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. as shown. Move. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. On the Design Bar. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. Press ESC twice. on the Standard toolbar. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click the Undo command. such as the Lines command.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 26 To end the command. click Modify. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 .

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008. This workflow begins with systems planning and design. At the end of this tutorial.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial. If the tutorial datasets are not present. 23 . you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. By following the recommended workflow. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. As you create the mechanical system. you can choose to save your work. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. methodology.

and click Rename. you create separate views in which to work with zones. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Mech.Mech. click Create.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. After you create these views. right-click Copy of 2 . 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file. and name the new parameter group Rooms. First. navigate to the folder of your choice. planning is critical to a successful design. Later in the design process. you refer back to the views to verify zone information. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file.Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. select Rooms. you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. Next. click the Training Files icon. Open the m Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Enter 2 . and double-click Level 2. and click OK 3 times. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room. click Yes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. and click Save. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click New. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. however. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan. Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. click Add. Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group. and click OK twice. 10 Under Parameters. and click Select. 2 In the Project Browser. Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter Office for File name. and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog. A new view called Copy of 2 . click New. you create a shared project parameter. 8 In the Save As dialog. right-click the view named 2 . Creating Zones In this exercise. under Categories.Mech Zones for Name. In this lesson.

Creating Zones | 25 . Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. 17 In the Project Browser. TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned. 14 On the Options Bar.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. under Mechanical. In this case. double-click 2 . click to filter the selected elements. all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. 15 In the Filter box. only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). click Check None.Mech Zones to make it the active view. you would have needed to manually align the selection. 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. All level 2 room tags are selected. and click OK. and then select Room Tags.

press Ctrl. TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room. enter zone 1 for Zone. select the Office 6 room component. Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click OK. Then. To clear a selection. and click (Properties). TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. select the first room component. and select each additional room component. Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28.Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below. under Other. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation). press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech Zones view.

and created a shared project parameter. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work. you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Zones Training for File name.Mech Zones view. However.Mech Zones. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties. you can choose to save your work.Mech Zones view.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Open the m Zones Color Scheme. you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 . and click Save. In the next exercise. Using this project parameter. navigate to the folder of your choice. 23 In the 1 . This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE After finishing each exercise.Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. Office 16 Office 14. you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. 25 In the Save As dialog. Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 . In this exercise.Mech and name it 1 . Office 5 Office 18 Office 17. You then copied room tags into the new views. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4.

under Scheme Definition. select Zone. and on the Options Bar. Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one. and click OK. 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Mech Zones to make it the active view. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. and click OK. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type. Verify that By value is selected. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 For Name. In the Type Selector. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Edit/New button. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click Drafting. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. right-click the Design Bar. select Number for Color Scheme. click Color Scheme Legend. do the following: ■ For Color.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK twice. and click Zoom to Fit. TIP You can also right-click. and double-click 2 . and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Next. and click to place the legend. enter HVAC. click Edit Color Scheme. click (Properties). 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones.

click the color scheme legend. and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector. Next. Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22). 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 19 In the drawing area. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. 17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 . select Number for Color Scheme. click Edit Color Scheme. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click the associated color.The modified color scheme displays. and click OK twice. The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). 22 In the Color dialog. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . This is because color schemes are view specific. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.Mech Zones to make it the active view. click Color Scheme Legend. under Basic Colors. double-click 1 .Mech Zones view. Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility. 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity.

In the next exercise. verify that Compute room volumes is selected. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click the Design Bar. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. click Heating and Cooling Loads. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog. Open the m Energy Analysis. and click Mechanical. 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. verify that Office is selected. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click OK. 23 If you want to save your work.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 24 In the Save As dialog. click Compute room volumes. During an energy analysis. and do the following: ■ For Building Type.

click Edit for Energy Data. click the Rooms tab. You have verified the building information. verify that Boston. View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. 9 Click (Highlight). For Place and Location. In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 . 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.■ For Building Construction. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that VAV . ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). under Energy Analysis. 8 Select 16 Office.Single Duct is selected. Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. you view various rooms in the building. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 7 Select Level 1 for Level. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. you need to view specific rooms. Next. Rooms are then listed for the selected level.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building. MA is selected. Next. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). Then. notice that the rooms in the building display.

The Office 16 highlights in red. and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. Next. 10 With the Highlight tool active. 12 On the View Selector. NOTE Using the View Selector. select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. If you select Shading. 13 Select Level 2 for Level. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane. Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin. you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 14 Click (Isolate). You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. you isolate a room. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model. the rooms display in blue. pan. and then select 25 Lounge. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level.

TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. Room Construction. Now that the building and room information has been verified. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. select Office 3 on Level 1. or room service values. you can perform an energy analysis. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden. and clicking Element Properties. Make your room information selections based on your specifications. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. or import the IES model that has already been created. right-clicking. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and the Loads Report Summary displays. these values on the Room tab will be blank. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. 19 Using the methods that you learned. After the energy analysis is completed. Next. room construction. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. 16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally. and Room Service. 15 With the Isolate tool active. you verify room information. The room information is located under Energy Analysis.

you will create supply air systems. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. You can also select the 1 . and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.21 Review the Loads Report Summary. Weather Data. 22 If you want to save your work. and validate your air system design. 23 In the Save As dialog. As you place the air terminals. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. sizing ductwork. You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this exercise. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. including the Project Information. click File menu ➤ Save. adding AC units. under Graphics. you create new views. click the Training Files icon. After system creation. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. In this lesson.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you specified building and room information. Then. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). and Room Summary. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. In the next lesson. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and click Save. Open the m Air Terminals. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. navigate to the folder of your choice. NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. and double-click 1 . Select Level 1 for Underlay. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms. and viewed room to verify room boundaries. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. modify air terminal parameters. Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties.

You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. click Air Terminal. for the Level parameter. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. and press Tab. the command in progress terminates. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . You can also press Esc to accomplish this. NOTE When entering a value. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. Placing Air Terminals | 35 . and enter 2615 for Offset.200 Neck. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. and enter 2615 mm for Offset. click Modify. 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view.5 In the View Range dialog. for the Top parameter. enter the value. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown. 6 Click OK twice. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. enter 0 for Offset. For example. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected.Ceiling Mech is the active view. ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for the Cut plane parameter. 9 In the Type Selector. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed.Round Connection : M_600x600 . TIP When you click Modify. 11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Under View Depth. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.

you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. under Constraints. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. and then click . and click OK. 17 In the drawing area. This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. Thus. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. and after the mid point snap displays. click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown.13 On the Options Bar. click to specify the move start point. enter 2600 for Offset. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms. move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan. the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. enter 150 L/s for Flow. 36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP To use the Move tool. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected.

then select Multiple. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. 19 On the Options Bar. and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination).The air terminal is placed. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Placing Air Terminals | 37 . Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that after you specify the copy start point. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 22 In the Type Selector.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). listening dimensions display to aid placement. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. click Air Terminal. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection.

Placing Air Terminals | 39 . and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them. select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. 24 In the Type Selector. place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms. 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm).Before you move the exhaust grill. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm.

29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. and click OK. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. right-click. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. click Modify.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click on the Edit toolbar. clear the UpFlowArrow check box. Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal. under Mechanical. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. 40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. In the Element Properties dialog. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. You will be using different views to design the systems. and click Save. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. specify the same view parameters as 1 . enter Air Terminals Training for File name. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. click File menu ➤ Save. 34 In the Save As dialog. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. navigate to the folder of your choice. Placing Air Terminals | 41 . do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers.Ceiling Mech the active view.After you place the supply air terminals. 33 If you want to save your work.

click the Training Files icon. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Air Terminals. modified the air terminal parameters. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. you create the air systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. and learned a method for precise placement. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise.In this exercise. 4 Under Select available fields from. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. In the next exercise. ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. select Flow. select Room. 5 While pressing Ctrl. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. under Available fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. do the following: ■ Under Category. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . More importantly. Open the m Air System Schedules. Click OK. In the next exercise. click Schedule/Quantities.

and Itemize every instance is selected. Select Blank line. in the Fields list. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Air Flow for Type.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. Select Between for Test. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. Click OK twice. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces. Select HVAC for Discipline. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. Verify that Formula is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. Select Footer. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . Verify that Ascending is selected. 10 Click OK. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value. select the field and click Remove. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . and click Conditional Format. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value. and Totals only. select Check Supply Airflow. ■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog.

A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. and press Tab. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. and maximize the 1 . 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met.Mech floor plan view. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. 15 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter.Mech to make it the active view. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. double-click 1 . and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . NOTE If a different project is also open. After you modify the airflow parameters. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. Next. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. 18 In the schedule. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. 16 Enter ZR. you are changing the air terminal connector size. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. the selected air terminal displays in red. 21 Close the schedule view. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green.

You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. This is the power of BIM. click System Browser. In this exercise. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. After creating the logical connection. If the System Browser does not respond. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and click View Properties. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 23 In the Save As dialog. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for the Top parameter. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. then press F9.Mech to make it the active view. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. under Extents. click Edit for View Range. click the Training Files icon. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. click in the drawing area to make it active. enter an Offset value of 3000. However. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements.22 If you want to save your work. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. Unlike logical connections. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. and then create the logical connection between the system components. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. During this exercise. 5 Click OK twice. 4 In the View Range dialog. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. Under Primary Range. and double-click 1 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and click Save.Mech view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you create air systems.

They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. For now. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 10 In the Type Selector. As you assign diffusers to systems. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click Mechanical Equipment. 11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. If desired. enter ZR. and press Esc twice. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. after you placed the diffusers. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Thus. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. click to place the VAV box. and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. if all system components are assigned. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.200mm Inlet. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. air terminals. So.

15 On the Options Bar. The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click (Select Equipment for System). Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser. 16 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Next. Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. enter 2900 for Offset. You created a system that includes the air terminal. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . you add the VAV to this system. and cleared from the Options Bar.Airflow. Under Mechanical . enter 165 L/s for AirFlow.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box. and click Element Properties. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. select an air terminal that you added to the system. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. and select the VAV box. click (Create Supply Air System). 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

■ Click (Next Solution). 20 On the Options Bar. select Main. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. and select solution 2. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). The organization is from upstream. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. and click Select to select the system. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. and select the system. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. click Settings. They remain assign to their respective default systems. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. Notice that Solutions is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. This display indicates that the new system is selected.

Enter 2900mm for Offset. For example.22 Under System Type: Supply Air. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. as was the elbow itself. 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 25 Click OK. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For example. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. For more information. Enter 2900 for Offset. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. select Medium for Detail Level. click Finish Layout. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. select Branch.Round for Flex Duct Type. thus it is not part of the system. refer to Help.

the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. click Sizing. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. and press Tab twice. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and enter . This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. under Sizing Method. and click to select them. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Verify that Only is selected. and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight. Click OK. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Under Constraints. On the View Control Bar. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Rerouting usually correct this issue. The first time you press Tab. select Coarse detail level for single line. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. fittings. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. then you know that a disconnection exists. 30 On the Options Bar. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.65 Pa/m. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal.

and click Element Properties.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter ZR. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 .The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. click to place the VAV box. 36 In the left column of the System Browser. double-click the second VAV box listed. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3). IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.200mm Inlet. click Mechanical Equipment. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. 34 In the Type Selector.

NOTE After you select a system component. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. click Add To System. 40 Click (Edit System). system equipment. This system includes the selected system component(s). and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. a new system is immediately created. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. If not. 41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. right-click. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click the component in the left column. enter 2900mm for Offset. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. and click OK. under Constraints. and number of elements in the active being edited.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. and click Select from the context menu. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. The component highlights in the drawing area. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. 38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector.

43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 47 Select the VAV box. 45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. the number of elements has increased to 2. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 . 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. click Select Equipment. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4. On the Options Bar. click Finish System.

Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar.If you leave the mouse stationary. The system displays in red. 50 Click to select the system. 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. click Layout Path. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 52 On the Options Bar. and select solution 3. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 .The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. click Finish Layout. This was the reason for the warning message.

So. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. you can review it and take action if necessary. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. 57 In the Type Selector. Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct.65 Pa/m. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. You can either relocate the VAV box. click Duct Fitting. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. Verify that Only is selected. and after the end point snap displays. Under Constraints. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Click OK. and click to select them.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. or modify the duct manually. click to place the endcap. If a warning occurs. and enter . click Sizing. 61 On the Options Bar. under Sizing Method. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 . Next. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The VAV box. However. Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. air terminals. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . and press Tab twice. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it.

200mm Inlet. 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Mechanical Equipment.Mech view. and click to place the VAV box.Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area. 69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). 65 In the 1 . 66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . 68 In the Type Selector. click Zoom in Region from the context menu.

and the red system display cleared. 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. click .71 Select the VAV. and press TAB once to highlight the system. and click OK. 73 While pressing CTRL. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. The new supply air system displays in red. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. click . enter 2900 for Offset. The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. under Constraints. 74 On the Options Bar. 75 On the Options Bar. Then. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . and enter 825 for AirFlow. and on the Options Bar. click . The selected diffusers highlight in red. You will add this later. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. click to select the system. 72 In the Element Properties dialog.

The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Next. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Modify. 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. You have logically connected the air system components. and select solution 3. 80 In the drawing area. ■ Click . 78 On the Options Bar. click Layout Path on the Options Bar.The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. select the left section of the main. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. you create the ductwork to physically the system components.

81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Next. select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. you need to modify the branch layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout.After you select the main. notice that drag controls display.

Undo the layout. click Add to System. the branch path is too close to the diffuser. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. A change has occurred in the air system design. The system components are now physically connected. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Finish Layout. The ductwork is created. and click on the Options Bar. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout.84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. mechanical equipment. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings.

VAV.Notice that on the Options Bar. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. 88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. the Number of Elements increased to 6. 90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. duct segment. and click Delete on the context menu. and working from the end of the main. select a system component that is already part of a system. This verifies the added diffuser. 92 Right-click. The new system component is now part of the same system. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. and the other duct segment. click Finish System. select the transition. Next. elbow. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 . Then. 91 While pressing CTRL.

and locate the top connector. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. 97 On the Options Bar. 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. 95 Zoom out the view. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. At this point. However. then you are dragging the lower connector. select the transition fitting. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. 96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. you can right-click the connector. You will draw duct in the next exercise. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. continue using the Layout Path tool. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct. 93 Zoom the view.

Ignore the warning message. and after the end point snap displays. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. click to place the endcap. Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. click Duct Fitting. 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 101 In the Type Selector. the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 .■ Click . Due to the takeoff based duct type. This caused the warning message to display. The new ductwork is created.

and press Tab twice. 66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. 106 Under Mechanical . You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system. change the airflow to 990 L/s. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and click Element Properties from the context menu. 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement. Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box.Airflow. Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct. and click to select them. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.

click Sizing. under Sizing Method.65 Pa/m. Under Constraints. double-click 1 . complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . Click OK.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. ■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. specify the air terminal airflow. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Verify that Only is selected. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. under Mechanical. Reposition and rotate if necessary. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. 108 On the Options Bar. and enter . If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.The selection displays in red. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Next.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser. For VAV airflow.

Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. 68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. You can either relocate the VAV box. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.65 Pa/m and select Only. If you receive errors. modify the duct manually. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 .Mech mechanical floor plan view. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. see the note below. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . So. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. or reinsert duct fittings. Do not change the duct conversion settings. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Next. If you receive errors. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. modify the layout. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. see the note below. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.

If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. navigate to the folder of your choice. checked duct connectivity. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. and click Save. If you receive errors. 114 If you want to save your work. You also specified VAV airflow. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. sized the ductwork. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. and validated the systems in the System Browser. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. If you receive errors. specify the air terminal airflow. Verify that all Other options are cleared. After creating each system.65 Pa/m and select Only. Do not change the duct conversion settings. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. Although you already checked duct connectivity. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . Size the duct using the Friction method at . Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. click File menu ➤ Save. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. In this exercise.■ For VAV airflow. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. see the note above. see the note above. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. In the next exercise. 115 In the Save As dialog. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below.

The section relocates under HVAC. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click the Training Files icon. Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. and click OK. right-click Section 1. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. After you add the section. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and the second click specifies the section tail.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 4. and double-click 1 . click Section. enter ZR. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. and click Properties. and 5. The first click specifies the section head. Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3.

similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. select Medium for Detail Level. click Modify. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 12 On the View Control Bar. The selected section displays in red.8 In the drawing area. click the section. You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. The section head displays in blue. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be.

20 In the Element Properties dialog.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. under Extents. and click OK. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. and click View Properties. and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view. A section box displays around the building model. Notice that in the 3D Mech view. 17 In the Project Browser. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. 18 On the View Control Bar. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. select Section Box. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. click Modify. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 21 In the drawing area. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . click (Dynamically Modify View). 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. click File menu ➤ Save. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 24 On the View toolbar. 26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. and click Save. 4. 27 If you want to save your work. Scroll. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. In the next exercise. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. use the Zoom. 28 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry.

and click to specify the start point.Mech to make it the active view. Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. 2 Enter ZR. 4 In the Type Selector. do the following. Enter 2900 for Offset. 5 On the Options Bar. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. select Round Duct : Taps. Verify that Angle is cleared. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:). 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . click Duct.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

10 Now. and after the listening dimensions appear. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right. enter 11000. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 . and click to specify the end point. 9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm. 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment.7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment.

move the cursor to the right. place the cursor over the duct.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. Depending on the location of the first duct start point. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR. it may not clear the wall. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. press Tab. and after the listening dimensions appear. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. after the connector snap displays. and select the duct (duct displays in red). 11 Finally. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. Next. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Then. click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. Notice that the Draw tool remains active. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. If the duct does not clear the wall. click to specify the start point. enter 3000.

If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and press Enter to specify the end point. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. When drawing duct. TIP When drawing duct. and click to specify the end point. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. 17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. If you pause briefly. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type.

and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. 19 With the Draw tool open. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4. After you click to specify the end point.18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete.

or width and height. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan. the duct diameter. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. 25 Right-click. However. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. 26 In the Type Selector. click to specify the start point. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. 27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the connector snap displays. 22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. On the View Control Bar. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . and click Draw Duct from the context menu. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.

29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown.28 Press Esc. 31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary. 80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. zoom the view to the right of the primary.

Do not size the primary. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. you will do that in a later exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. and Angle is cleared. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. Finally. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. On the Options Bar. specify a 2900mm offset. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. You will size the primary in a later exercise. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Check connectivity. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise.

Check connectivity.Mech to make it the active view. 37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. On the Options Bar. You will size the primary in a later exercise. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. and double-click 2 . Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. specify a 2900mm offset. Do not size the primary. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. and Angle is cleared.

Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. click the Training Files icon. and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary. click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 38 If you want to save your work.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Finally. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. In this exercise. In the next exercise. and click Save. 39 In the Save As dialog. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . navigate to the folder of your choice. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. While drawing duct. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 1. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct.

press Tab once. you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. click Routing Solutions. The selected primary duct run displays in red. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction. However.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 6 Select Solution 1. and click to select the primary and its fittings. and click Finish.

verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. 7 Select the VAV box. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. 11 Place the cursor over the primary.The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 . Next. and click to specify the end point. 8 Right-click. you check connectivity. and press TAB twice. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below.

rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. In this exercise. then connect the VAV to the primary. Open the m Duct Sizing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. 86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 . 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. click the Training Files icon. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. After resolving the conflicts. The routing solution and connection are shown below.Mech to make it the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. 15 Using the process that you just learned. 17 In the Save As dialog. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. and click Save. Before sizing the primary. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. This determines the airflow direction. you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. click File menu ➤ Save. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts.Velocity. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. 16 If you want to save your work. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. However.

NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. and after the end point snap displays. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click Duct Fitting. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 .Mech to make it the active view. and click to select it. 4 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. right-click the Design Bar. and double-click 1 . IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Mechanical. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the endcap. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.

5 m/s. Click OK. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. Under Constraints. under Sizing Method. Verify that Only is selected. click Sizing. and enter 12. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. 9 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.The selected primary displays in red.

modify the layout. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. 13 Using the process that you just learned. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. You can either relocate the VAV box. Next. or reinsert duct fittings. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. modify the duct manually. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 . place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly.The sized left primary is shown below. and press TAB twice. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. So. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser. As in level 1. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. 14 Using the method you have learned. and double-click 2 . 90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below.Mech to make it the active view.The sized right primary is shown below.

you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Then. and click Mechanical.Mech. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Selector.19 If you want to save your work. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. First. 20 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 .Velocity Training for File name. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the next exercise. In this exercise. right-click Copy of 1 . duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. you sized the primary duct for the building. click the Training Files icon. and click to place the legend. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech is created and becomes the active view. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. right-click 1 Mech.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. right-click the Design Bar. enter 1 . Like room color scheme. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. Open the m Duct Color Scheme. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 . 2 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. and click Rename. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. enter Duct Sizing . 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays.

and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. click Edit Color Scheme. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. select the duct color scheme legend that you placed. Select By range. click in the second row. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box. and on the Options Bar. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. and enter low velocity for the first row.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. In the Caption column. Next. and enter 7. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. In the Color column. In the Color column. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. and enter high velocity for the second row.5 m/s. and click OK. In the At Least column. delete the existing text. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area.

navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Rename. right-click 2 Mech. Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser. click Duct Color Scheme Legend.Mech Duct Classes for Name. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. 18 If you want to save your work. and click to place the legend. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Save. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of 2 . The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. 15 In the Type Selector. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme.Mech.Mech is created and becomes the active view. and click OK.The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. 19 In the Save As dialog. enter 2 .

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 1 .In this exercise. If the System Browser does not respond. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. Finally. not ductwork (physical connections). 2 In the System Browser. such as a VAV box and diffusers. click the Training Files icon. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. click Close to deactivate the Show tool.Equal Friction. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.Mech to make it the active view. and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Duct Sizing . All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. First. and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system. expand the Mechanical systems folder. click in the drawing area to make it active. and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. To accomplish this. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. TIP If the System Browser is closed. 3 Right-click Supply Air. 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. Every supply air system that you created is listed. and click Expand All. and double-click 1 . In the next exercise. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. and click Show. then press F9. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes.

9 With the Split tool open. TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 . and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box. and click to select them. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main. Note that the VAV box is not selected. 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. click (Split). move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main.Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar.

12 On the Options Bar. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. Click Tags. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Notice that as the airflow decreases.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Next. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. ignore this warning. and click to place each tag. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined. 15 On the Options Bar. and enter . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.65 Pa/m. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. under Sizing Method. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. 16 In the Tags dialog. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. under Category. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it. transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. for Ducts. Under Constraints. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Clear Leader. do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. click Tag ➤ By Category. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at . click Sizing. and click Cancel.

Finally. 2 Right-click in the view. you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise. Open the m Inspecting Air Systems. pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. In this exercise. select the tag and drag it to a new location. click the Training Files icon. 20 If you want to save your work. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 . and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method.Equal Friction Training for File name. and click Save. 21 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 2 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. First. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice.Mech to make it the active view. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter Duct Sizing . click Zoom in Region from the context menu. you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. Using this tool. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. 1 In the Project Browser.TIP To reposition a tag.

Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 5 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT To select a system. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. and click Inspect from the context menu. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. A tooltip also displays the system information. select (Inspect). The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. click Inspect.You will inspect this system. or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. After the System Inspector opens. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . Right-click a system from the System Browser. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. select any duct segment. duct fitting. System tools display on the Options Bar. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow. pressure. diffuser. 98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. Next. These are not logically connected to this system. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path. click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system.

and pressure information for various systems in the project. click the Training Files icon. 3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. and click Rename. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 17 In the Save As dialog. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. select Mechanical for Discipline. 16 If you want to save your work. and click OK. Open the m Placing AC Units. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. In the next exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you place 2 AC units. under Graphics. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector.13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. and click View Properties.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. navigate to the folder of your choice. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. airflow. and click Save. For example. In this exercise. You also compared system information across a system. right-click Copy of Roof. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click Roof. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton. You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. click Mechanical Equipment. 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown. and then click Modify on the Design Bar.25 Ton . select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). 9 In the Type Selector. Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view.This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. 12 Click to place the AC unit. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter ZR. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay.

17 In the Project Browser. click Section. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. 16 Move the cursor to the right. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click Section 2. select HVAC for Sub Discipline.Next. under Graphics. 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. click to specify the section end point. and click to specify the section start point. and click OK. and click Properties. 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box. Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.

notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface. 25 Select the AC unit. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. To place the AC unit on the roof surface. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 21 On the Design Bar.20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. 23 On the View Control Bar. AC units are level-based components. click Modify. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. you must relocate it. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 . click Medium for Detail Level. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

click to specify the move start point. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface. 27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned. 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it. The AC unit placement is shown below. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view.26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. Use the Move tool. and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.25 Ton . click to specify the move end point. Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. and after the end point snap displays. Next. use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface. (300mm directly above the start point). (Remember to select the reference edge first).

In this exercise. 30 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. navigate to the folder of your choice. 2 Select the section box. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. ■ 29 If you want to save your work.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level. you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. In the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. First. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface. Then. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . click the Training Files icon. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. Note that if this option is unavailable. click (Dynamically Modify View). TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button. 3 On the View toolbar. you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. If you like. Next. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog.The entire building including the AC units display. and drag the mouse to spin the model. if you do this. drag the mouse to spin the model as shown. and while pressing the middle mouse button. Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. the active view is the only open window. Remember that.

select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. and press Tab. the active view is tiled to the left. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. 14 On the Options Bar.6 In the Project Browser. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. the connector snap displays. TIP When tiling 2 views. ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -750 for Offset. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset. place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. 11 In the Roof Mech view. 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). click Duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. under Mechanical. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. and 500 for H: (height). TIP When drawing duct. 10 In the Type Selector. double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 .

2900mm. 15 Move the cursor up. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point. The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. and after listing dimensions display. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. connections are automatically created. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm.The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. If the 2 are different.

and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 . TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 18 Close the Roof Mech view.Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted. double-click 2 .Mech to make it the active view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. On the View Control Bar. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 .Mech view. Notice that only the duct riser displays.Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser. You now switch to the 2 . Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 . 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.Mech view.

The selected items display in red. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select 450. 23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser. click Duct. 26 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). select the horizontal primary segment. For Offset. 22 In the 2 Mech view. click to specify the start point. select Round Duct : Taps. 25 In the Type Selector. and while pressing CTRL. select the adjoining elbow. Verify that Auto connect is selected. verify that 2900 is specified. and after the mid point snap displays.

28 Move the cursor over the primary. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. The left primary is connected to the AC unit. click to specify the end point. 29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the centerline snap displays.

You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit.Mech view. and place the cursor over the end connector. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. 112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 32 In the 2 . 33 Select the right primary duct.Next. 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.

This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. click to specify the duct segment end point. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. and after the centerline snap displays. if you use the Create Similar tool. However. or by right-clicking a connector. and after the connector snap displays.34 Drag the connector to right. 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary. 35 Select the primary duct. NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. 36 On the Edit toolbar. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 . then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. . click (Create Similar). you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector.

38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. and click to specify the end point. and click to specify the segment end point. 40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser. 39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser. 114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected.Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 . place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool. You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. 42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. Check connectivity 43 In the 2 . However.

You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. 47 Place your cursor over the top edge. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. 116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. Add endcaps 44 In the 2 . click Duct Fitting. 46 In the Type Selector.Mech view. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. zoom in on the duct riser. click to add the endcap.The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected.

. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard.48 With the Duct Fitting tool open. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 . click to add the endcap. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. 49 In the Type Selector. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays.

drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity. 54 Using the 2 views. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit.A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. Next. Create the high pressure supply air system. verify the duct riser endcap. and then validate its geometry. 53 In the 3D Mech view. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.Mech view to make it active. 56 With the 2 views tiled. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. click in the 2 . You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork.

60 On the Options Bar. click Check None.Mech view range. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. In this case. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . and then select Mechanical Equipment. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. and click OK.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. click selected VAV boxes to it. 59 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 58 On the Options Bar. and select the level 2 AC unit. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view.

or even without ductwork. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). 68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. all system components must be logically connected by a system. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. This is the system that you just created. expand Mechanical. In the Unassigned folder. 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . However. and click Select. 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. Supply Air. 65 In the System Browser. 67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser.You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector.

Next. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. and a 500mm height. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . you complete the level 1 primary supply air system.Mech drawing area to make the view active. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. click Inspect.The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. 71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Specify the offset to -4400mm. move the cursor down. 2900mm. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. Next. 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. you inspect the system. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. Click the supply connector. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. duct fitting. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 . and enter 1050mm. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. and click Inspect. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width. The System Inspector tool opens. diffuser. 73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. click Inspect. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.

Mech view (if open). This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. In the 1 .This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . open the 1 . select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view.Mech view. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech view. Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. Watch for the centerline snap as shown.

■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. release the mouse button. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge.Mech view.■ Connect the primary to the AC. Instead of drawing duct. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. and after the edge highlights. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. ■ In the 1 . and remember to zoom the view. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view. The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. select the left primary duct segment. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 .

Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. and validated these logical connections. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. 124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Validate the system using the System Browser. In the next exercise. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. Using tiled windows. you check the systems in your project. click File menu ➤ Save. 79 In the Save As dialog. and quickly target those systems that need attention. ■ 78 If you want to save your work. and for duct sizing. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. and click Save. you need to validate them.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system.

Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. the duct is now associated with that system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. Checking Air Systems | 125 . NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning. In the System Browser. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. thus assigning the components to a system. and for duct sizing. Then. However. click the Training Files icon. For example. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. as a tutorial exercise. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. click Check Duct Systems. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. So. After you assign the system components to a system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. Open the m Checking Air Systems. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. As you view the warnings. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser.

Depending on your air systems design. and click Save. 6 Using the same methods. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. You now confirm the systems that you created. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. you create hydronic piping systems. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. placing a circulator pump. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. 11 In the Save As dialog. 8 Right-click Supply Air. Then. 9 Right-click a system. In this lesson. TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. In the next lesson. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. and inspecting the piping system. In this exercise. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name.The red lines represent the default logical connection. 10 If you want to save your work. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. click File menu ➤ Save. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. otherwise click Close. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system.

pipes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Creating Piping Views. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech is created and becomes the active view. and click Edit for View Range.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset. and enter -3500 for Offset. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Next. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . After completing the air systems lesson. scroll down to the Extents category.IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems.Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. 7 Click OK. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2 . 9 In the View Range dialog.Piping for Name. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. for Level. enter 2 .Piping view selected in the Project Browser. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Under View Depth. a boiler. First. click the Training Files icon. and click Rename. For Bottom. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. you create new views in which to design the piping system. and enter 950mm for Offset. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. you change the view range. circulator pump. Creating Piping Views | 127 . right-click 2 Mech. 2 In the Project Browser. click properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and click OK. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. and under Visibility. A new view called Copy of 2 . click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids. and enter -3500mm for Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and the systems to logically connect the system components. under Graphics.

Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. On the Filters tab. and click OK. The 2 . For example. 18 Under Filter Rules. and press Tab. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. and enter VG. Also notice that 2 . You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. So. 17 Under Categories.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. it will be best to create filters. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. just enter the value. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components.Piping view. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. and verify that equals is selected. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. 10 Click OK twice. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. however. click the Filters tab. they will not filter all system elements needed. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. the system filters are not used. 14 Click Edit/New. In this lesson. Considering this. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog.NOTE When entering a value. click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. you can add and activate filters. select Mechanical Equipment. (New). you do not need to type measurement symbols. 15 In the Filters dialog. click in the drawing area to make the view active. under Filters. However.

common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Next. click (Properties). You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. Next. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. . click Edit / New. or even a description that you define. and click OK twice. you must spell both verbatim. under Filters. enter Air Terminal for Description. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). 26 On the Options Bar. type name. 22 Under Filter Rules. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. However. you may want to select each component type separately. system type. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. 25 In the Type Selector. 23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. Click Apply. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. click Air Terminals. otherwise the filter will not work. 29 Click Apply. and click OK. This is the same rule for using formulae. Verify that none is selected for And. return. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter.■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. So. click Air Terminal. you create a description as the common filter criteria. 21 Under Categories. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. Depending on the filter criteria. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. To do this. you need a define common filter criteria. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. select Description for Filter by. Creating Piping Views | 129 . such as family name. 19 In the Filters dialog. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. and verify that equals is selected.

And: Type Name. you filter duct fittings by system type.200 Neck. verify that equals is selected. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. you need to define the filter again. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter.Round. To filter multiple duct fitting types. you specify a family and a type name. 38 Using the methods that you just learned. Category: Ducts. 35 Click in the 2 . 31 Under Identity Data. Next. For Type. Category: Duct Fittings. create the following new filters according to the specifications. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. select M_600x600 . and enter Supply Air for system type name. So.Next. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. Round Ducts. then the type parameters will not display. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. And: Type Name. click Edit/New. click in the Value column for Description. you can select it. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. Filter by: Family Name. and click Apply. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. Category: Ducts. Category: Ducts. return. This is because the selected supply. 33 Click OK twice. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. Filter by: Family Name. 39 Click OK. you continue to create and define the filters. click the Filters tab. verify that equals is selected. 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. ■ Flex Ducts . Filter by: System Type. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. and enter VG. Remember. verify that equals is selected. 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. verify that equals is selected. Because you already entered the description. verify that equals is selected. you will not see the Description type parameter. verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: Family Name. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and select Round Duct for the family name. 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . and select Air Terminal. Next.Duct Fittings.Piping view to make it active. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. If you did not click Apply.Round Connection. Category: Flex Ducts. Remember to click Apply. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. you need a common filter criteria. So. By selecting each air terminal type separately. 37 On the Filters tab. if differences exist in the selected elements. Filter by: Family Name.

do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. You used this duct to create the duct riser. Next. 45 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 47 Right-click in the drawing area. 46 Enter 1 . you add and activate the filters. 43 Click OK. 41 In the Add Filters dialog. and click View Properties. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.Mech. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. right-click 1 Mech. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. right-click Copy of 1 . Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them.Piping for Name. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You now define the view properties. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. click Add. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer.Mech is created and becomes the active view. and click OK. Creating Piping Views | 131 . You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. A new view called Copy of 1 . select all of the filters that you created. Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. and click Rename. 42 Under Visibility. you activate the filters. under Graphics. This is because you have not added them.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system.

52 In the View Range dialog.Piping view. 55 In the Project Browser.Piping view displays the new view settings. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. As you create the pipe runs. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. ducts. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. and click OK. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. you will be unable to view the duct riser. and to create the level 1 piping system. click the Filters tab. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). you will want to validate the geometry. Next. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. under Graphics. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . such as halftone architecture. scroll down to the Extents category. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. you change the view range. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. under Primary Range. click the Annotation Categories tab. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset. If you turn off ducts visibility. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. and click Rename. Next. 57 Right-click in the drawing area. 50 Click OK. The 1 . and click View Properties. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. Unlike the 2 . clear Grids. 53 Click OK twice. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click Edit for View Range. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and under Visibility. right-click 3D Mech.

and double-click 2 . You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.Piping to make it the active view. click Mechanical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 65 Click OK. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 61 In the Add Filters dialog. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. and click Save. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler. 63 Click OK.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the next exercise. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. click File menu ➤ Save. You used this duct to create the duct riser. 66 If you want to save your work. you place the radiators and a boiler. navigate to the folder of your choice. right-click the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. You also created filters to display certain system components. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 67 In the Save As dialog. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select all of the filters that you created. clear Section Box to turn it off. and click Piping. 62 Under Visibility. and click OK. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. 4 In the Type Selector. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. under Extents. click Add. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise.60 On the Filters tab. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar.

TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. except for the windows on the radius wall. 6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 8 Click to place the radiator. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown.5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall.

you modify the radiator flow rate. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0. 14 Enter .Piping to make this the active view. right-click a radiator. click . If parameters are blank. and click Select All Instances. and click OK.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. verify that 1. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. double-click 1 . Next. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. All level 2 radiators display in red. under Mechanical Loads. drag the section tail. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. If so.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. Next. then these are different across the selected objects. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. for Flow. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. 12 On the Options Bar. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 . the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. and you do not want to include it. If the same type of component exists on another level. you place the boiler. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.25 for Flow.

20 In the drawing area. and click Element Properties. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . under Type Parameters. and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector. click Mechanical Equipment.50 L/s is set for Max Flow. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. right-click the boiler.16 Enter ZR. verify that 14. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. watch the listening dimensions. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions. Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. you verify the boiler flow rate. Next.

You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. 1 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Save As dialog. As you assign radiators to systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty.22 Click OK. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 23 If you want to save your work. Thus. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. In the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If the System Browser does not respond. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. click in the drawing area to make it active. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. navigate to the folder of your choice. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. after you placed the radiators and boiler. In this exercise. So. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. click File menu ➤ Save.Piping to make it the active view. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. if all system components are assigned. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. you create the supply and return piping systems. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. click the Training Files icon. click System Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. analyses cannot be performed. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. After creating the logical connection. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. During this exercise. and double-click 2 . IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and then create the logical connection between these system components. and click Save. then press F9.

6 On the Options Bar.Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. right-click. All level 2 radiators display in red. Notice that after you click . click (Create Hydronic Supply System). and click Select All Instances. and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. 7 On the Options Bar. (Select Equipment for System). click supply system. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. all other components are unavailable. 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. This display indicates that the new system is selected. you create the return piping system. 9 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. Thus. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. right-click. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. click . press Tab.The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. and select the system. and click Select to select the system. Notice that is does not display. The organization is from upstream. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. So. Next. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator.

and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and cleared from the Options Bar. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. In this exercise. These listings represent the systems that you just created. 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Save. expand Piping. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). click File menu ➤ Save. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. and click Select. or even without pipe being drawn. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. 18 In the Save As dialog. in the next exercise. 17 If you want to save your work. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. navigate to the folder of your choice. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. 13 Right-click each category. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection.

Piping view range highlight. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. In a later exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice that all components that are in the 2 . and double-click 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Filter box. click the Training Files icon. Creating Pipe Runs | 141 . and then select Mechanical Equipment.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators.Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. click Check None. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.Piping to make it the active view.

6 In the Select a System dialog. The system displays in red. select Hydronic Supply 1. click Layout Path. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. you can place the cursor over a radiator. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. then the Select a System dialog will open. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 5 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components.The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. 7 Click OK. Notice that the radiators. You will need to select a system to create the layout. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. the boiler. Then. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.

11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution). ■ Verify that 0. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Using this inset. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. and select solution 5. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path.00° is specified for Slope. verify that Main is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. click Settings. 9 On the Options Bar. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. It does not reference the architecture. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 . You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. Next. Enter -375mm for Offset. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall.The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. verify that Solutions is selected. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Later in this exercise.

select Branch. you now modify the layout path. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. refer to Help. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. or architecture. Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Enter -375 for Offset. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. zoom the view. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. structural beams. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. 15 Click OK. For more information. The layout path is located under the radiators. click Modify. 17 In the drawing area. and other obstacles.

drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path. 18 Using the drag control.A drag control displays. Creating Pipe Runs | 145 .

You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select a different layout solution. and is not part of the system. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. or offset elevations are incorrect. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. click Finish Layout. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. or manually modify the pipe. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted. For example. Either relocate the system components. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection.

The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . This is caused by the hidden line setting. Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. To turn off hidden lines. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. In the Mechanical Settings dialog.Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. select Fine for Detail Level. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). If a pipe is hidden by an object. 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). Some pipes are hidden causing a gap.

The design requires 2 zones. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. Next. Additionally. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. select Coarse for single line display. TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. and click to select them. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 25 Place the cursor over the pipe. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Instead of moving the pipe. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. So.23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. On the View Control Bar. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. Medium for 2-line duct display. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog.

and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. Creating Pipe Runs | 149 .26 Press Delete to delete the selection. and click to select it. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. and click Modify on the Design Bar. Next. select 25mm for D: (diameter). 29 On the Options Bar. 28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe).

The first time you press Tab. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. If the entire network does not highlight. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. If the pipes had different diameters. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . fittings. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and equipment. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. press Tab 3 times. the diameter would not display. width. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. then you know that a disconnect exists. Next.

This allows you to better see disconnects. you can click to select them. This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout. You need to correct the disconnect.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. Creating Pipe Runs | 151 . 34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected.

Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting. 37 Click the plus sign located to the left. and select it. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. 36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow.

The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. A minus sign displays. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. 39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting. 38 Click the tee fitting. and click the right plus sign. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. 40 Click the elbow fitting.

Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Pipe. click to specify the pipe segment start point. 43 In the Type Selector. The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. select Pipe Types : Standard. 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting. and after the fitting end point snap displays.

If you do not use the connector snap. If drawing contiguous segments. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. to locate a connector and create the connection. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically. TIP When drawing pipe. you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. click to specify the segment end point. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. If you pause briefly. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. and then specify an end point. a connection may not occur. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. use the connector snap. and after the connector snap displays. .TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. NOTE When drawing pipe. and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector.

and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. click (Dynamically Modify View). 51 On the View toolbar. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. you validate the pipe geometry. 50 On the View Options Bar. and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run. Scroll. Next. Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. use the Zoom. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and press TAB twice to check connectivity. specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line. 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment.

Remember. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. For pipe conversion settings. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 . Verify that 0. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. Enter 600 for Inset.00° is specified for Slope. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets. Select Perimeter solution 3.Next. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space. ■ In the Layout Path tool. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. you create the return pipe run.Piping view. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. In the next exercise. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. 54 If you want to save your work.The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. navigate to the folder of your choice. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. and click Save. You checked connectivity. converted fittings. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. corrected disconnects. 55 In the Save As dialog.

and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and double-click 2 . click Zoom in Region. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 .Piping to make it the active view. and click to specify the section head location. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. The first click specifies the section head. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and the second click specifies the section tail.1 In the Project Browser. click Section. After you add the section. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31).

6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. 160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail.

11 On the View Control Bar. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. and click OK. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view.NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. The section relocates under Piping. under Graphics. right-click Section 4. The section head and tail display. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 7 On the Design Bar. select Fine for Detail Level. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. select Piping for Sub Discipline. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. click Modify. Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section).

mechanical equipment placement. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. place the cursor over the top connector. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. and other aspects of your systems design. and after the connectors display.Piping to make it the active view. Next. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 .

18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. release the mouse button to reconnect it. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 . and after the fitting end point snap displays. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run.

click (Split). If you split the pipe. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. Next. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting.NOTE When modifying pipe. and select the return pipe segment again. 19 Zoom out. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. 21 On the Edit toolbar. 164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . always connect to pipe segments. you split the supply pipe segment. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above. fittings. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed.

Next. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. and draw the pipe around the stairs. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 . you convert a tee fitting. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. 24 With the Split tool open. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. 25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. Zoom out the view. move the cursor down. and press Delete to delete it. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted.

click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 32 Zoom out the view. convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. 30 In the Type Selector. Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. 29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and move the cursor to the left. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. and after the end point connector snap displays. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.

and after the connector snap displays. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right.34 Draw the pipe down. Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 . especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. NOTE When drawing pipe. click to specify the segment end point.

36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 38 Right-click the lower connector. This activates the Draw tool. 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors.

verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. This needs to be corrected. However. click to specify the move start point. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. Second. click (Move). 43 On the Edit toolbar. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . specify the move destination or end point. 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays. 40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned.39 In the Type Selector. or width and height. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. First. IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. the pipe diameter. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment.

Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). and after the listening dimensions appear. Next. enter100.45 Move the cursor up. This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing. Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The interference has been resolved. you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase. and press ENTER to specify the move end point. Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

click (Split). you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. you may get a false positive result. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. Otherwise. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 . Although this section was used for air systems. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 49 Press ESC. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section.The section displays in red. 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 .Piping to make it the active view. watch the listening dimensions. 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. select Fine for Detail Level. 50 On the View Control Bar. 54 On the Edit toolbar. 57 Using the methods that you learned. and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. 48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. and double-click the section head to open the section view.

draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 58 Again. Remember to watch for connector snaps.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. using the methods that you learned. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Connecting the Boiler | 173 . Using Create Similar. Open the m Connecting Boiler. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. navigate to the folder of your choice. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. Remember that after you create pipe. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. In the next exercise. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. 61 In the Save As dialog. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. preferably a connector snap. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. the pipe type is also matched. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. click File menu ➤ Save. Then. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. 1 In the Project Browser. Using these 2 methods.59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. and offset are automatically specified. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the start point. 60 If you want to save your work. Draw. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. (2) Connect to a snap. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. you used the Split. diameter (or width and height). always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. click the Training Files icon. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection.

and double-click 2 .Piping to make it the active view. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. You will design in the 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. the active view is tiled to the left. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views. 3 In the Project Browser. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. Note that if this option is unavailable. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . the active view is the only open window.

10 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Pipe. ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1. This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected.8mm. watch the listening dimensions. 14 Move the cursor to the left. Enter -1500 for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and after the connector snap displays. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection.8 Zoom in on the boiler.

you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. enter -375 for Offset. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. and click to specify the end point. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. 3275mm from level 1.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 16 On the Options Bar. zoom the view and try again. click to specify the pipe segment end point. 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP When drawing pipe.) to separate snap increments. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm. In a later exercise. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. after listening dimensions display.

20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 177 . 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and after the connector snap displays. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe.The boiler supply connector pipe is created. release the mouse button to connect to it.

23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.

you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. right-click the right connector. 27 In the 3D Piping view. 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 24 With the windows tiled.Piping view to make it active. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 29 Zoom in on the tee. and click it. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. click the tee to display the connectors. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.Next. Connecting the Boiler | 179 . 28 Click in the 2 .

36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. In a later exercise. 32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. enter 900 and press Enter. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and the start point is automatically specified. 31 On the Options Bar. Verify that Angle is cleared. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 34 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end point. and after listening dimensions display. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. 35 With the Draw tool activated. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 Draw the pipe up. connect the right supply pipe run. This creates a 900mm pipe segment.The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. enter -375 for Offset. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run.

39 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 181 .The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 38 Check connectivity.

45 On the Options Bar. 43 On the Options Bar. 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. and enter 150 and press Enter. 42 In the Type Selector. 41 Select the boiler. zoom in on the boiler. and click Draw Pipe.Next. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. enter -525 for Offset.Piping the active view. and that Auto Connect is selected. and the 2 . you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Next. and right-click the return connector. This places the return connection 250mm above level 1. and click to specify the end point. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 44 Move the cursor up.

Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. 47 On the Options Bar. 48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe. IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. you draw the return pipe to the left. an automatic connection is made. As you draw. Make certain that the 2 . Connecting the Boiler | 183 . the connection is not made. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane.Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. If Auto Connect is not selected. verify that Auto Connect is selected.Next. click to specify the end point. This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

clear Auto Connect. 51 Select the return pipe segment. and click Draw Pipe. You see it clearly in the 3D view. click to specify the end point.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and right-click the top connector. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool. 52 On the Options Bar. 53 Again. and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above. 50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment.

press it once to stop drawing the current object. In the floor plan view. Connecting the Boiler | 185 . You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. select Hidden Line. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. 56 Draw the pipe to the left.Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. press ESC to deactivate the tool. 55 Select the return pipe segment. right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. TIP When drawing pipe. To turn off hidden lines. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. If a pipe is hidden by an object. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. Next. click the specify the end point. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. On an open pipe segment or run. If the pipe segment or run is closed. and twice to deactivate the Draw tool.

and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. click to connect to the left return pipe run. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 59 Zoom in on the boiler.

and click to specify the end point. 62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right. Connecting the Boiler | 187 . click to specify the end point. and click Draw Pipe.61 Select the tee fitting. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. right-click the right connector.

Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 65 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run.64 Using the method that you learned.

67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler. draw a section view. and adjust the view as shown. Connecting the Boiler | 189 . Next. 68 Using the section view creation method that you learned.

74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view. under Graphics. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. select Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click OK. 71 Right-click in the drawing area. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label.69 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 73 On the View Control Bar. click Fine for Detail Level. 70 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view.

select the reference point where you want to align. in the 2 . click to specify the alignment reference point. 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. and then you select the point to align. click (Align). click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. 77 On the Tools toolbar.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 76 With the 2 . Next. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes.75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. and after highlights. If the Tools toolbar is not available. First. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. Connecting the Boiler | 191 .Piping view. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process.

NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. click to specify the point to align. 79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. 192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 193 . Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts. 80 Using the alignment method you just learned.

Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.The aligned return pipes are as shown. This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned. 82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting. 194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. and click to select them. you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. Finally. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. you size the supply and return piping runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs.Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Next. In this exercise. 84 If you want to save your work. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. 85 In the Save As dialog. enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. and after it highlights. In the next exercise. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler.Piping to make it the active view. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. Open the m Pipe Sizing .The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. and double-click 2 .

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 2. Select And. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog.5 m/s for Velocity. Either relocate the system components. Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. and that Restrict Size is cleared.00 Pa/m. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. ■ Click OK.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red. The sized pipe runs are sized. select Friction. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing. click Sizing. and enter 250. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. 8 If you want to save your work. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and click Save. In this exercise. 9 In the Save As dialog. enter Pipe Sizing .Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 . you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. 6 In the Project Browser.Friction & Velocity Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. In the next exercise. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

click the Training Files icon. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable. 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 1 In the Project Browser.Piping to make it the active view.Piping view. You place the pumps in the 2 .Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown. the active view is the only open window. and double-click 2 . 3 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. the active view is tiled to the left. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. 8 Watch the listening dimensions.7 On the Edit toolbar. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown. click to place the circulator pump. and after the centerline snap displays. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. click Mechanical Equipment. The selected pipe segment displays in red. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard. click (Split). Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. 13 In the Type Selector. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. and press Spacebar to rotate the pump.

You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. 200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 16 Press ESC twice. and watch for the centerline snaps. notice that the pump is not located near the selection point. 17 In the 3D Piping view. drag the pump away from the pipe. and then move it over the pipe opening.TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump.

21 Click OK. you connect the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 18 In the 2 . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. To clear the selection. under Constraints. click .Actually. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. If the pump remains selected. click Modify on the Design Bar. you can click in the drawing area. You need to specify the pump offset. 19 On the Options Bar. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation.Piping view. and after the connector snap displays. You can also right-click the pump. click the pump. and select Element Properties. release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump. 22 In the 2 . TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value. 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. click the pipe segment. enter -1500 for Offset. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 . or press ESC. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area.Piping view. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next. click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished.

25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump.Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. and press TAB. you need to check connectivity. 202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 26 Place the cursor over the pump. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection. After connecting the pump.

27 Using the methods that you just learned. connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 . Make certain that you align the right pump to the left. and check connectivity. 28 With the 2 . you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. Next.

204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. 31 Click the rotation control on the right. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right. rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. 32 Using the method that you just learned.

Expand the Piping folder. Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Immediately after placement. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. You can also press F9. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system. System tools display on the Options Bar. As you learned in previous exercises. you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. click System Browser. 34 In the System Browser. and so on) that you placed to a system. do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. select the left supply pipe riser. they move to their respective system folder. After you assign the components to a system. 35 In the 3D Piping view.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. Finally. pressure. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system. Using the System Inspector. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. 40 If you want to save your work. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. such as VAV boxes. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. NOTE Do not click . and click Save. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure. 41 In the Save As dialog. boilers and AC units. and by clicking the rotation controls. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. click (Edit System). If you use this tool. click Add To System. In the next exercise. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. 36 On the Options Bar. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. click Finish System. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . 1 In the Project Browser. and pressure information including pressure loss. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. After the System Inspector activates. flow. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system. 5 On the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler. 2 Right-click in the view. and so on that you have assigned to a system. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. select Hydronic Supply 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 4 Select the boiler. System tools display on the Options Bar. select any pipe segment. click (Inspect).Piping to make it the active view. A tooltip also displays this system information. click Inspect. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. 6 In the Select a System dialog. fitting. Right-click a system from the System Browser. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. System tools appear on the Options Bar. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. click Zoom in Region from the context menu.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Inspect from the context menu. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 2 .

also known as the critical path. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment. and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. As you inspect. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next. 208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.

click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 17 If you want to save your work. and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Checking Piping Systems | 209 . use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. In this exercise. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. flow. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. and click Save. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch.11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. double-click the 3D Piping view. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. In the next exercise. you need to validate them. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. 18 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. and for pipe sizing. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 16 Using the methods that you learned. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. In this exercise. You also compared system information across a system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. you check the piping systems. and quickly target those systems that need attention.

Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. The piping system is logically and physically valid. Open the m Checking Piping Systems. However. then press F9. the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Warnings display. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. right-click the Design Bar. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check Pipe Systems. Next. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.Piping to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. As a tutorial exercise. and click Piping. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. click Check Duct Systems. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. you confirm the system component assignments. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. double-click the 2 . After you assign the system components to a system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If the System Browser does not respond. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and for pipe sizing. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. click in the drawing area to make it active. In the System Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. thus assigning the components to a system. check system warnings may occur. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. Next. For example. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Then. 210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. the pipe is now associated with that system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).

11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. Checking Piping Systems | 211 . 6 In the Project Browser. 12 In the System Browser. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. otherwise.Because you assigned all piping components. TIP If you have multiple views open. you confirm the piping system assignments. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 9 Right-click Default Return Air. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems. The red lines represent the default logical connection. 10 Using the same methods. Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. and click Expand All. click Close. The supply system that you created. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view.Piping to make it the active view. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.

and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. Depending on your air systems design. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. 17 In the Save As dialog. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. a boiler. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. 16 If you want to save your work. and fin-tube radiators. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. navigate to the folder of your choice. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and section views. Design the system in the 1 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. the creation and modification methods remained the same. For pipe offset. it is a valid system without problems. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. 15 Using the methods that you learned. In this tutorial. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. click File menu ➤ Save. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. and click Save. In this exercise. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. circulator pumps. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. 3D. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. In the lesson. Finally. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. parametrically modify those designs. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. For additional practice. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems.

213 . you can choose to save your work. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. go to http://www. you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. If the tutorial datasets are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk. However.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.

For example. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. The electrical settings determine the voltages. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. the Limit Offset. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. wiring. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. analyze. apply templates to your views. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. 3 Click Wiring Types. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. wiring. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. click the Training Files icon. For this reason. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. distribution systems. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. in the left pane. Later. and in the right pane. then applying the appropriate template to each plan.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. power distribution systems. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. expand Wiring.rvt. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. and demand factors that you will use in your project. By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. and click Add. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building.

00 V 277.00 V 490.00 V Maximum 130.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 480.00 V 208.00 V 460.00 V 220. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions. By specifying a range.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V 200.00 V 260. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. For example.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 .0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 280.

7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. this type of system (High.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. For example. even though this is physically impossible. Red. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. 9 Click Demand Factors. click Distribution Systems. 8 In the right pane. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan. and rename it 1-Lighting. You can specify one or more Demand Factors.000VA 10.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. For this exercise. HVAC. 10 Click OK.000VA 3. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. enter 1-Power. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . Power. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.000VA. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 14 Using the same method.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. at any given time. leave the default settings as shown here. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. for Name. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. For example. create another copy of level 1.000VA. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. or Other systems in your project based on their load. right-click Level 1. A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list.000VA 10. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3.

rfa M_Receptacle. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. which are available from view templates. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 20 In the Select View Template dialog. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Families. and the view range. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. and click Apply View Template. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. Lighting Plan. the view discipline. and click OK. expand Ceiling Plans. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan. you need to apply settings. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. The Power Plan. 23 In the Project Browser. which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. right-click Level 1. 28 While pressing Ctrl. 17 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 19 In the Project Browser. select Power Plan from the list of templates. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view. 22 In the Select View Template dialog. and click OK. click Lighting Plan. which further defines their position in the project browser. apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. right-click 1-Lighting. 24 In the Select View Template dialog. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. 27 In the Open dialog. 25 Using the same method. and click Apply View Template. and click Apply View Template. The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. and click Rename. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline. and click OK.Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec. right-click 1-Power. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. 30 In the Project Browser. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. 15 In the Project Browser. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu.rfa 29 Click Open. View templates let you easily control view properties.

You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). Later. Under Parameter Data. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. and demand factors. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. click Add. In this exercise. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. selected components for your electrical systems. 31 Using the same method. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. containing several switch types.Surface. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. voltages.rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. and established the parameters for your wiring. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and so on). has also been added under Lighting Device. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. As you loaded each of the component families. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. In this case the key style is the type of room and. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert.Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. conference rooms.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. Open the provided dataset. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. reopen the Electrical folder. as described below. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder.Surface. restrooms. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. 33 You can save the open file if you wish. distribution systems. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219.

enter Room Lighting Requirements. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. To verify this. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. 4 Click OK twice. For Name. ■ Click Schedule keys. double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. For Group. However. 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements.Lighting category. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Electrical. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. and when the cross-hairs display. Under Categories. select Electrical-Lighting. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. In the Element Properties dialog. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog. Select Instance. click (Properties). For Type. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner. 7 On the Options Bar. click to select the room. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. select Rooms.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 8 Click Cancel. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Illuminance.

Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. ■ Click OK. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type. one for each type of room in the building. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). enter Lighting Levels. according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names.■ For Key Name. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 .

under Instance Parameters. While pressing Ctrl. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. Office). right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. In a worksharing environment. 20 Click OK. the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. in the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Identity Data category. click Properties and. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. click . 19 Scroll up to the Electrical . NOTE Generally. and for Lighting Level parameter. and select Open Office. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. In the Project Browser.TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. and click Element Properties. 21 Using the same method. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. assume you would have full access to this view. and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. then right-click.Lighting category. 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan. For tutorial purposes. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . then right-click one of the selections. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx.

and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. if required. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. Consequently. as described below. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 . selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. For example. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset.

15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. for the Color. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. enter Required Lighting Levels. for Title. and click OK. and click OK. select Underline. select Required Lighting Level. and place it in the drawing. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. select Rooms for Category. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. and click (Duplicate).Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. enter Required Lighting. 6 For Color. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. Under Title Text.rvt. 7 Click OK. select Show Title. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. for Name. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Required Lighting . 14 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Training Files icon. click Edit/New. and click OK. and click Element Properties. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. select Required Lighting Level. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view.

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

7 You can save the open file if you wish. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). as described below. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the provided dataset. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. and work toward the higher voltage. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

5 On the Design Bar. click Electrical Equipment. for Distribution Sys. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . click Modify and select the panel you just placed. select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. select Electrical Equipment. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. 11 In the Type Selector.rvt. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. 4 In the Type Selector. 9 Click OK. select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads category. and for Panel Name. scroll down to the Electrical . click the Training Files icon. click Element Properties. select 480/277 Wye. Right-click the panel. 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .Surface : M_250A. 6 On the Options Bar. and click to place the panel as shown. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. under Electrical . Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. and double-click 1-Power.Loads. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment. under Instance Parameters. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown.

scroll down to the Electrical . Since this is a transformer.Loads category. select 120/208 Wye. 14 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. under Instance Parameters. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and place the panel to the right of the transformer. click . and on the Options Bar. select Electrical Equipment. and on the Options Bar. enter T1. for Distribution Sys. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter L-1. 20 Select the panel you just placed. For Panel Name. click .Loads category.Surface : M_100A. select 480/277 Wye. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 23 Click OK. 19 Click Modify. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. and for Panel Name. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 . select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution Sys. 18 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Options Bar. scroll down to the Electrical . 16 Click OK.

28 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 26 On the Options Bar.Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. The temporary circuit displays as shown. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. 29 Select the transformer T2. . and click 30 On the Options Bar. and select panel H-2 for Panel. 27 Click (Select Panel). select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. click (Create Power Circuit). The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. select panel L-2. click . A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel.

The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 . 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. . A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. select the H-2 panel. 37 Close the 2-Power view. 34 In the 2-Power view. . and on the Options Bar. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. click 35 On the Option Bar. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. click . and select the MDP panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. select the L-1 panel. and click 39 Click . and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with.

. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.40 Select the T1 transformer. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). as described below. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and select the MDP panel. 1 In the Project Browser. click . The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and click 41 On the Options Bar. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. click the Training Files icon. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250. 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and data systems. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. lighting. Circuits are used for power. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. Open the provided dataset.

The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. For now. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 While pressing Ctrl. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). and voltage (120 V). Creating Power Circuitry | 251 . load (180 VA). A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. click . select all the receptacles in the corner room.

6 Click Modify. and click to select the circuit again. press Tab. 8 On the Options Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. and press Tab. click circuit. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room. and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar.Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types.

Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. 1-#10. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. If you select L-1 in the drawing. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. The currently specified values are 1-#12. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building.11 On the Options Bar. and add it to panel L-1. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. and ground wiring. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. click (Edit Circuit). 19 Close the warning message. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. click The circuit is created. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. . 1-#6. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. click . 1-#12. 16 On the Design Bar. which are the wire sizes for the load. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. creating power circuits. neutral. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and select panel L-1. 22 Click OK. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. When editing a circuit. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. and click Element Properties. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. and select panel L-1. 1-#12. The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. respectively for this circuit. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. click . 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. select Circuit Properties. change the value from 20A to 50A. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. scroll down to the Electrical . under Instance Parameters. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter.Loads category. click Cancel Circuit.

create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2. as previously described. 27 Using the same procedures.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. and then select panel L-1. 26 Continue creating circuits. click . 29 Select the L-1 panel. and on the Options Bar. 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). click . and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. These will be connected in a later exercise. 25 On the Options Bar. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. 254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . These will be connected in a later exercise.

you have assigned only 17. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 . 30 Click OK. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. Finally. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. 1 In the Project Browser. Open the provided dataset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog.In the Edit Circuits dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. as described below. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding wiring to a project is optional.rvt. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. As you saw in the previous exercise. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits.

click Check None to clear all the check boxes. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Close the message window and. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 5 In the Filter dialog. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected.4 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click OK. click . 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click (Filter).

When creating wires. click .9 On the Options Bar. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. click . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 . 10 On the Options Bar. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. or floors. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. click . ceilings. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. as in this step. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown.

for Hot Conductors. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. you can specify splined wiring. lighting fixtures. ground) in the wire run. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. Splined wiring is similar to arc. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. under Instance Parameters. but with an additional vertex. enter 2. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . you created arc type wiring. 13 In the Filter dialog. and assign the circuits to panel MDP. neutral. 16 Using the same method.In this step. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. Later. click . move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. one neutral conductor. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. when you create wiring manually. and click OK. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. enter 2 as the value. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. and click the switch to select the switches. and click OK. select Wires. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. When this occurs. 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. In the next steps. and click OK. click Check None. 12 On the Options Bar. click . 14 On the Options Bar. press Tab. and one ground conductor).

then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. These will be connected in a later exercise. Otherwise. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. assign the circuit to panel H-2. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. conference room.18 For more practice. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. and assign the circuits to panel H-2. lounge.

Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project.rvt. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. 260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. and specify switch IDs for switches. but does not prevent you from doing so. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Create Switch System). 2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). In the left pane of the Open dialog.21 You can save the open file if you wish. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. fixtures. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. click the Training Files icon. and panel information. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. as described below. Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. assign lighting fixtures to switches.

With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. After creating the switch system. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch).4 Click (Select Switch for System). 5 On the Options Bar. click (Edit Switch System). ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. click Finish to confirm your selections. Creating Switch Systems | 261 . you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. and on the Options Bar. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click Remove From System. select Multiple. 6 On the Edit Switch System tab.

12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. click . click Finish. 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Finish System. 15 On the Edit Switch System tab. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click Switch Properties. click 14 Click . and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. . and click OK.8 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Switch Properties. and on the Options Bar. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. for Switch ID. click Select Switch. for Switch ID. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system.1st Floor. under Instance Properties. 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. under Instance Properties. 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. click Finish System.West. 20 Click . enter North Stairwell . enter Main Entrance .

Verify that Ascending is selected. Creating Switch Systems | 263 . For Name. stairwell. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and for Heading. enter Switch Systems. select Number from the Fields list. enter Room Number. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 26 On the Formatting tab. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Rooms. select Number. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view. scroll down the Available fields list. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. scroll down the Available fields list. Click OK.21 Using the same method. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

conference room. as described below.2nd Floor for the switch ID. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. Specify Open Area . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon. and private offices. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. Open the provided dataset. Create separate systems for the lounge. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. Otherwise. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. restrooms. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. 30 For more practice.

move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it.rvt. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms. 5 Using the same method. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. click Wire. 3 In the corner room.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. 9 On the Options Bar. and delete both home runs. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 . 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. 4 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit.

266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire. as shown.10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire.

when the wiring is completed. The direction will be corrected. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . and using the same method. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible. When completed. if necessary.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run.

16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. In the previous steps. and a shared safety ground). and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room. and click. select Insert Vertex. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. 17 Right click the wire run. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. as each room was added to the wiring run. 14 Click Modify. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. a shared neutral. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run.

adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. 19 For additional practice. Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . The wire behaves like a spline. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.

click the Training Files icon. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. In this exercise. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.rvt. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Open the provided dataset. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible. “Checking Your Design ” on page 270.

a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. Checking Your Design | 271 . The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. 8 In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. collapse Power. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. each with a load of 180VA. and click Select. 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. release the mouse button. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1.4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. and expand Unassigned. The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located.

click . 272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. 14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. click to select the circuit. click to create permanent wiring. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. and on the Options Bar. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. In the System Browser. press Tab. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. 16 Click Finish Circuit. click Add to Circuit. and on the Options Bar. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell.

select Wires. 18 In the 1-Lighting view. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Options Bar. click . Checking Your Design | 273 . under Instance Parameters. and click OK. In the System Browser. enter 2. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. for Hot Conductors. 24 In the drawing area. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. press Tab. 21 Click . and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. and click OK. 20 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. 25 On the Options Bar. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible.

click 27 Click . to create permanent wiring. select panel L-1. 28 Using the same method. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.26 On the Options Bar. click Check Circuits. 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. 274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. and in the Mechanical/Electrical room.

33 Close the Warning dialog. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Open the provided dataset. Finally. as described below. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads.rvt. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog.31 Click to view details of the warning. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

while Phase A provides 4500 VA. In the Project Browser. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. and double-click 2-Power.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. select panel L-2. 276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . B. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA). This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Rebalance Loads. Examination of the loads on Phase A. and Phase C provides 4140 VA. click .

enter 100A for the Trip value. and circuits 7. After the loads are balanced. you can use a 30kVA transformer. a load of 18844 VA. you may see different values for the loads. 7 In the Project Browser. so no further changes are required. double-click 1-Power. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Therefore. and for T1. 12 In 1-Power view. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. and 11 feed panel H-2. 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. click .After re-balancing loads. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. 13 In the Type Selector. 11 Click OK. enter 40A for the Trip value. select the T1 transformer. click . The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. and 6 feed transformer T1. and on the Options Bar. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. for panel H-2. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. the distribution is shifted. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. 4. Had there been a greater imbalance. the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. L-1 and MDP. and on the Options Bar. a load of 12780 VA. and the T1 transformer. Therefore. the H-2 panel. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog. The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). Circuits 2. H-2 is a 100A panel. 5 Select panel H-2. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). 9.

20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. . which will require a 40A circuit breaker. click (Circuit Properties). 1-#3. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. on the Options Bar. for transformer T2. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. under Instance Parameters. 23 Click OK. enter 40A for the Trip value. 18 Click OK. 1-#8. click . on the Options Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Scroll down. enter 100A for Rating. select panel L-1. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. and click Element Properties. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 1-#12. select panel H-2. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. 1-#12. 100. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100.14 In the Error dialog. 19 With panel L-1 selected. and on the Options Bar. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Notice that it changes to 3-#3.00A. click Disconnect.

Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser. . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. click Disconnect. 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. 38 On the Options Bar. under Electrical Loads. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit.27 Click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 36 With the MDP panel selected. select the T2 transformer.00A. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. 28 In the 2-Power view. 31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 29 In the Type Selector. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 37 Close the Warning. Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . select T2. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Instance Parameters. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. click . and on the Options Bar. select panel L-2. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. 34 Click OK. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. 30 In the Error dialog.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

including plumbing fixtures. you can choose to save your work. As you create the plumbing system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. After finishing each exercise. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial. hot and cold water piping.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. 281 . you will understand the process. By following this workflow. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. If the tutorial datasets are not present. and sanitary piping. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. methodology. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. All of the loaded families. planning is critical to a successful design. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. are added under Families in the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families.rfa 5 Click Open. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. click the Training Files icon.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In this lesson. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 In the Project Browser. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa 11 Click Open. The selected component families are loaded into the project. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems.rvt. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. click the Training Files icon.

select None For Cross. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. under Mechanical. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. select Tee For Tee. right-click PVC Sanitary. select Tee For Tee. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. 7 Rename the new pipe type. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. click Duplicate. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. PVC Sanitary Vent. and click Properties. click Rename. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 Right-click PVC 2. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . and press Enter. under Mechanical. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. 2 Right-click PVC. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select None For Cross.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise.

In this lesson. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 3 sinks. you add 2 toilets. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. ZR (Zoom Region). Finally. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 urinals. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures.Plumbing to make it the active view. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. click Plumbing Fixture.rvt. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 wall-mounted urinals. and 3 sinks. and double-click 2 . 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. You then modify the piping. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process.

and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click to place the toilet. verify that Vertical Face) is selected. click to place the toilet. and on the Options Bar. click to place the toilet. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left. click Plumbing Fixture. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 .6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. (Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room.

16 Move the cursor down. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. (The placement is not critical. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. 18 Working from left to right. and click to place the dimension annotation. move the cursor up. (Aligned) is selected. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. verify that References is selected for Pick. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. and click to place the dimension annotation. as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. 17 Using the same method. click the centerline of each urinal. and click.) 12 Click Modify. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall.

and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. and click OK. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. click the value for the blue dimension. and in the Type Selector. and for Plane. 25 In the drawing area. select Sink Single Island : Public. 24 In the Work Plane dialog. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. click Plumbing Fixture. 21 While pressing Ctrl. and press Delete. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. under Specify a new Work Plane.19 Select the rightmost urinal. select Pick. select Pick a plane. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select the counter top. and enter 500.

specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560. 28 Place a second sink near the right wall. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. 29 Click Modify. click Dimension. (The placement is not critical. and then delete the dimension annotations. and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. equalize the space between sinks. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and click Edit. click Plumbing Fixture. under Extents. select Level : Level 2. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the floor drain. 36 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. scroll down to View Range. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. urinals. and for Plane. “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and click View Properties. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. 35 Click Modify. and double-click 2 . Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. and floor drain. as shown. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 . click the Training Files icon. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. and in the Type selector. 2 Right-click in the drawing area.

NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. 5 Click OK twice. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects.4 In the View Range dialog. and in the Type Selector. specify Fine for Detail Level. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard. click Branch. specify -1500 for Level Offset. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. 21 Click Modify. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Click Window ➤ System Browser. click Mechanical Equipment. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. click Mechanical Settings. specify -300 11 In the left panel. click View ➤ Piping. 6 On the View Control Bar. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. and under View Depth. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. 16 Right-click in the system browser table. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. under Primary Range. and click Main. specify -300 13 Click OK. 9 In the right panel. 20 Move the cursor over the chase. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. select Sanitary from the System Type list. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset.

25 On the Options Bar. and floor drain. as shown. and click OK. toilets. low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. click area.The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. under Constraints. The urinals. (Select Equipment for System). 24 Zoom in on the men’s room. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 26 On the Options bar. enter -1200 for Offset. and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 . Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. The elevation will be specified as -1200. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. click (Create Sanitary System).

and on the Options Bar. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. click Layout Path. 292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. click Modify.The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. 28 Click Solutions. as needed. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. see Layout Paths. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals. enter 1. For more information on Layout Path solutions. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar.00 for Slope. 30 Select solution 1 of 6. as shown. to view them. 27 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal.

32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . in line with the branch segment. 33 Click Finish Solution. and drag it into the chase.

34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. Select each pipe segment in the system. checking for the proper connectivity. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. When fittings are reversed. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. slope. The third tab should highlight the entire system. and check the slope control. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. The second tab highlights the fixture.

39 On the View Control Bar. 36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 . specify Fine for Detail Level. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.35 In the Project Browser. 37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. VG (Visibility/Graphics). click Show categories from all disciplines. Enter the keyboard shortcut. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. and double-click 3D Plumbing.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines.Plumbing to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. In the left pane of the Open dialog.40 You can save the open file if you wish. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system. adding the sinks in the men’s room. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.rvt. and double-click 2 . and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

If you select the pipe. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. 8 Click Modify. 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. When you press the space bar. enter 3950. and on the Options Bar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. press the Space Bar once. enter 1000 for Slope Run. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. click to place the fitting. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. click Pipe Fitting. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. and when the extension snap displays.00 for Slope Angle. 6 In the Layout Options dialog.4 Select the tee. right-click the connector on the open leg. and click Draw Pipe. click Options. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and click OK. enter 1. and press Enter.

and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. click to specify the end of the pipe. verify that the slope is specified as 1.00 for Slope Angle. click Pipe Fitting. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector. click the size for the wye leg. 14 Using the method learned earlier. and press Enter. click to place the fitting. 17 In the Layout Options dialog. and on the Options Bar. 15 Select the wye fitting. highlight the wye. and click OK. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and when the wall centerline snap displays. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. 298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and when the extension snap displays. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and click Draw Pipe. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks. enter 50.11 Select the fitting. right click the connector on the open leg. click Options.

enter 150 for Offset. 21 In the Project Browser. click to specify the end of the pipe. In this case. 20 On the Options Bar. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. and click Modify.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. click Apply. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added.

29 Click the connector snap on the right leg. This is best done by carefully following these steps. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. and click OK.00 for Slope Angle. 32 Click Modify. 26 Select the double wye fitting. 31 Drag the pipe to the right. specify 200 for Offset. click Pipe Fitting. click to specify the end of the pipe. 22 In the 3D view. click Pipe. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. and on the Options Bar. click Options. 28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. press Space. and click to place the fitting. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Plumbing tab. enter 45. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise.If necessary. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard.

40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Options. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and select the leftmost sink. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click Apply. 36 In the Layout Options dialog. and click OK. and press Delete. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 43 Click Modify. 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. an elbow. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. specify 400 for Offset. and another segment of pipe. 38 Click Modify. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. click the connector snap.Plumbing. verify that 45. and click Draw Pipe. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 42 On the Options Bar. 37 Drag the pipe to the left.00 for Slope Angle is specified.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. and press Delete. and double-click 2 . click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 44 In the Project Browser. click Pipe again. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . click Pipe again. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting.

specify 0. 51 Select Pipe again. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. 54 While pressing Ctrl. 52 In the Project Browser. 48 In the Layout Options dialog.00 for Slope Angle. specify 40 mm for Size. and click to specify the end of the pipe. click Options. and click OK. specify 450 for Offset. 49 On the Options Bar. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. 50 Click Modify. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. double-click 3D Plumbing. select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. and on the Options Bar. and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. and on the Options Bar.

click Routing Solutions. 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. 60 Using the same method. click Routing Solutions. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 63 On the Options Bar. and select a proposed solution. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 56 On the Options Bar. 57 Select solution 3 of 3. Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. 58 While pressing Ctrl. 59 Select solution 2 of 2. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . and on the Options Bar. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points).

you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. and click Select. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. Now that the routing is completed. When zoomed in close. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. and in the Type Selector. click (Edit System). You can move fixtures by dragging.00 for Slope. 67 On the Options Bar. expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. there is a smaller movement. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). 65 Using the same method. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. 69 One at a time. 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. and click Finish. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard.64 Enter 1. you can make minor adjustments to the system. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. click Add to System. 68 On the Design Bar. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. When the piping was created for the sink drains. and click Finish System. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. right-click Sanitary 1. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . select all 3 sinks. modifying offset values. 66 In the System Browser. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. 72 While pressing Ctrl.

) 75 If you want to save your work. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. skip the next 2 steps. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 . and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector. otherwise. (After the third tab. the entire system should be highlighted. highlight the leftmost sink. 77 Click File menu ➤ Close. 76 You can save the open file if you wish. 74 Using the method learned earlier. click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye.

5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.78 Proceed to the next exercise. while maintaining the same angle. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. click (Move). select it and on the toolbar. adjusting the sanitary stack. 4 Select the upper elbow. click the Training Files icon. and press Delete. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and select the horizontal pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown.

and on the Options Bar. and click to place the fitting. and when the Extension snap displays. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 .8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe Fitting. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard. specify 150 for D (diameter). 10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe.

The wye is added to the vertical segment. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. enter 100 to change its size. and click piping. double-click 2 . and click Modify. If necessary. 14 On the View tab on the Design Bar.Plumbing.11 Click Modify. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Enter. click Section. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. select the wye. click the value for the 45 degree leg. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.

17 Zoom in. double-click 3D . click Pipe.Plumbing.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. and when Vertical and Extension displays. and press Enter. specify Fine. for Detail Level. enter -750 for Offset. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . and click to specify the end of the pipe. 16 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. and select the reducing wye fitting. enter 45. click Options.00 for Slope Angle. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. 19 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. and click OK. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg.

an elbow. click Routing Solutions. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Delete. 26 While pressing Ctrl. and on the Options Bar. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 27 Select solution 2 of 2. 25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added.24 Click Modify. and another segment of pipe.

35 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Plumbing tab.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. and click the connector snap. 32 Click Modify. click Pipe. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . and click Apply. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. specify 1200 for Offset. 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.

In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.) 3 Press Delete. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. running it inside the wall. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. click the connector snap.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. then down to connect with the sanitary main.Plumbing to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . (If necessary. 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. use the Filter tool to select only piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping.36 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines. click the Training Files icon.

11 Click Modify.The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. and when the snap displays. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. double-click 3D. and click to specify the end of the pipe. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. enter 300 for Offset. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. 12 In the Project Browser. drag the preview to the left approximately 200.Plumbing to make it the active view. click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click Draw Pipe. and click Options.00 for Slope Angle. starting at the level of the original pipe. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 . verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. specify 50 for D (diameter). 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain. specify 1. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. click once to specify the end of the pipe. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.

and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.Plumbing to make it the active view. and click OK. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. click Options. and zoom in on the urinals. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal.Plumbing. 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe. verify that the slope is specified as 1. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe. 25 In the Project Browser. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 24 Click Modify. and click Create Similar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. double-click 2. double-click 3D. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. and on the Options Bar.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. 18 In the Layout Options dialog. click Pipe. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser.00 for Slope Angle. 20 Click Modify. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.

So.Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser. Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. and on the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 . you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. specify 80 for D (diameter). and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown.Plumbing to make it the active view. double-click 2 . specify 80 for D (diameter). However. 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals.

and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. and in the Type Selector. Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. double-click 3D. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click to place the plug on the tee. This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. click Pipe Fitting. and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. and on the Options Bar. specify 50 for D.30 Select the elbow. and when the extension snap displays. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard.Plumbing to make it the active view. 35 In the Project Browser. 36 Select the vertical pipe. and in the Type Selector. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . 39 You can save the open file if you wish. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.37 Click Modify. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping.

and in the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. 6 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. and specify 2700 for Offset. click the Training Files icon. 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify 0. 10 Click Modify.rvt. 9 Click Apply. click Options. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee.00 for Slope Angle. specify 50 for D (diameter). 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. If necessary. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. 1 In the Project Browser.

specify 2700 for Offset. 15 Using the same method. click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe.12 On the Options Bar. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . and click Apply. place another vent between the two rightmost urinals. 14 Click Modify. as shown. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. specify 50 for D (diameter). 13 On the Options Bar. use the Flip control to make the adjustment.

24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. specify 3000 for Offset. and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee. and press Space. right-click the connector at the open end. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. A short section of pipe is added to the tee. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 25 Select the leftmost vent. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and click to specify the end point. click Draw Pipe. click Apply. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and click Modify. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. click Pipe. right click the connector. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance. and click Draw Pipe. and in the Type Selector.

click Pipe. and on the Options Bar. and specify 2700 for Offset. specify 50 for D (diameter).28 Click Modify. 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 50 for D (diameter). and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . 30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 34 On the Options Bar. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. 31 While pressing Ctrl. click Apply. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. click Draw Pipe. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals.35 Click Modify. 36 Select the vent. 37 Drag the pipe preview. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. right-click the connector at the open end. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe.

and in the right pane. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. 13 In the left panel. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list.Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. click View ➤ Piping. 10 In the left pane. and in the right pane. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. click Rename. 5 Right-click Cold Water. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. specify Tee For Tee. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. click Main. and press Enter. click the Training Files icon. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. and click Duplicate. Create the Cold Water System | 323 . and press Enter. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 12 In the table. click Branch. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. 9 In the table. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. in the right pane. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition. click Main. enter Hot Water for the new name. specify None For Cross. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset.rvt. 11 In the left pane. right-click Standard. in the right pane. and double-click 2 . and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. enter Cold Water for the new name. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and click Properties. click Mechanical Settings. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. click Branch. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 3 Right-click Standard 2. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. click Rename. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 4 Right-click Standard 3. expand Piping ➤ Conversion.

324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. click the floor drain. click (Connect Into). and click to specify the end the segment. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). and on the Options Bar click (Filter). and click to end the run as shown. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. click Options. 18 In the Filter dialog. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. click Check None. 29 Click Modify. verify that the slope is specified as 0. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. click Pipe. then select Plumbing Fixtures. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type.00 for Slope Angle. and click OK. 24 In the Layout Options dialog. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. 30 Select the middle sink in the view. and on the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. select the domestic cold water connector. and click OK. 31 In the Select Connector dialog. select Pipe Types : Cold Water.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. specify 750 for Offset. and in the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 19 While pressing Shift.

and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. select the cold water pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 41 Drag the preview to the left. click Pipe.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. Create the Cold Water System | 325 . drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks. 42 On the Options Bar. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. 39 On the Plumbing tab. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. and click to end that segment. click to specify the end of the pipe. click Pipe. 32 On the Plumbing tab. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. click the snap on the cold water pipe. 36 Click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. (If necessary. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. specify 600 for Offset. specify 2600 for Offset. 40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. and click Apply.

select the rightmost toilet. 44 In the Project Browser. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. double-click 3D. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. and click the + control to change it to a tee.43 Click Modify.Plumbing. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 48 On the Plumbing tab. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. click Pipe.

and click the vertical cold water pipe. 53 Select the rightmost urinal. Create the Cold Water System | 327 . Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 52 Select the leftmost toilet. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture.49 Click the open connector on the tee. 54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar click . . and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee. 50 Drag the preview to the left. 51 Click Modify. and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown.

but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). specify 50 for D (diameter). 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. 58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main.All of the cold water piping is in place. 57 On the Options Bar. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. F8. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. and then select the horizontal segments as shown. as shown. feeding the toilets (including the tees. click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut. 56 While pressing Shift.

specify 20 for D (diameter). 62 On the Options Bar. specify 40 for D (diameter). Create the Cold Water System | 329 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 64 You can save the open file if you wish. 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks.59 On the Options Bar.

click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). click the Training Files icon. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330. and click to place the water heater as shown. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. to the left of the main cold water pipe. create the hot water system. 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click (Filter). 5 In the Filter dialog. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 10 Double-click M_Water Heater. click the title bar for the browser. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. and click View ➤ Piping. click the Training Files icon. and in the Type Selector. double-click 2 . 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. and click OK. and zoom in on the sinks. click Check None. select Plumbing Fixtures.Plumbing. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system.rfa.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Plumbing Fixture.

20 Select the water heater in the view. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20. click (Edit System). and click Select. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. and click Finish System. 19 On the Edit System tab. Create the Hot Water System | 331 . 15 On the Options Bar. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. and on the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. expand Domestic Hot Water. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe.14 In the System Browser. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). and click the main cold water pipe. select the water heater in the view. and click Select. click (Edit System). right-click the connector. The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar. expand Domestic Cold Water. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. 16 On the Edit System tab. 17 In the System Browser. click Add to System. select the water heater in the view. and click Finish System. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. click Add to System.

24 Move the cursor over the water heater.23 On the Plumbing tab. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click Pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Plumbing tab. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and in the Type Selector. specify 800 for Offset. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. click when the hot water connector displays. specify 2550 for Offset. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .

34 Select the middle sink in the view. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. click Draw Pipe. specify 800 for Offset.Plumbing. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click to specify the end of the segment. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click water pipe below the sinks. 33 Click Modify. click Apply. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. (Connect Into). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 40 In the Project Browser. 39 Click Modify. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. and click to end that segment. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. Create the Hot Water System | 333 . 38 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 36 Right-click the open connector. double-click 3D. and click the hot In this case.

41 On the Plumbing tab. 42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 44 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click Pipe. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. 43 Click Modify. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.Plumbing. double-click 2 . This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems.

If the tutorial datasets are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. methodology. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. 335 . you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will understand the process. At the end of this tutorial. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. By following the recommended workflow. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. After finishing each exercise. go to http://www.Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. However. As you create the systems.

you create views and pipe types. This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline.Fire Prot for Name. During the fire protection design process. verify that Mechanical is selected. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. naming it 1 . enter Fire Protection. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. naming it 3D Fire Prot. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. Then. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. manually modify the pipes and fittings. right-click the view named 2 . TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. naming it 2 . For Sub-Discipline. and finally. 7 Using the method that you just learned. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time. right-click Copy of 2 . right-click in the drawing area. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. under Graphics.Fire Prot view active. 6 Click OK.Mech is created and becomes the active view. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view. Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project. 3 Enter 2 . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view. create schedules. and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . and click OK. In this lesson. click the Training Files icon. A new view called Copy of 2 . and click Rename. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers.Fire Prot. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next.Ceiling Fire Prot.Mech. You create views and pipe types. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . insert fittings.Mech. you modify the view properties. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms.Ceiling Mech view. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and size and tag the pipes. 4 With the 2 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties.

you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. click Modify. you modify the pipe type properties. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. select Main. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. the command in progress terminates. click Edit/New. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Next. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. modify. 16 With the Type Properties dialog open.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. 23 Under System Type. 10 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Mechanical Settings. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. and click Fire Protection. Next. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. for Material. 18 In the Type Selector. Next. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. including the new material property. enter Fire Protection Wet. click Duplicate. click (Properties). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. under Mechanical. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. You can also press Esc. In the Project Browser. click Pipe. 14 For Name. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE You can also create. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. select Carbon Steel. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. Next. click Duplicate. TIP When you click Modify. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. 22 For System Type.

verify that 2750 is specified. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Branch. Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser.■ For Offset. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. verify that 2750 is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 26 Under System Type.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. or architecture. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. 27 Click OK. For Offset. Next. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). double-click the 1 . The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar). and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. duct. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. refer to Help. 25 For System Type. structural beams. TIP If a view does not contain room tags. 29 Enter ZR. So. select Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For more information. you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views.

select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines. You will need to reactivate it. 35 On the Options Bar. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point. if you reopen Revit MEP. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. enter 6400. enter 0. The new pipe displays. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session.30 On the View toolbar. 32 In the Type Selector. for Offset. For Offset. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. click Pipe. 33 On the Options Bar. This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. select 150 mm. do the following: ■ ■ For D. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell.

you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. click (Dynamically Modify View). In this exercise. In the next exercise.TIP When entering a value. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. navigate to the folder of your choice. just enter the value. use the Zoom. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. 41 In the Save As dialog. Scroll. you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Next. using this information. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you created new views and modified view properties. Then. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. you place the sprinklers. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. you can choose to save your work. 40 If you want to save your work. you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule. 38 On the View toolbar. As you place the sprinklers. 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. select Fine for Detail Level. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. and press Tab. First. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area). The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. For example. 36 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. and click Save. Finally. you do not need to type measurement symbols. Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2.

4 While pressing Ctrl.1 square meters. click Schedule/Quantities. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. For Discipline. click the Training Files icon. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. verify that Common is selected. enter Area/12. 6 Select a field. Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. Click OK. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 . Verify that Formula is selected. Sprinklers. do the following: ■ Under Category. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Area. enter Min. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Available fields.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. and click Remove. verify that Number is selected. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog. Open the m Placing Sprinklers. For Formula. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. To remove a field. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select it.1. select Rooms. For Type.

For Rounding. select Min. select Level. select Fixed. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. Under Level. For Then by. Verify that Ascending is selected.NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Sprinklers. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK twice. For Field formatting. verify that (none) is selected. Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Format dialog. For Units. select Level 2. select Number. Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. Next. verify that (none) is selected.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. select 2 decimal places. including spaces. The Min. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). sorted according to room number. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. and double-click 2. 9 Click OK. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. 15 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Field Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. For And. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. Verify that equals is selected.

click to specify the line start point. 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. verify that Lines is selected.Next. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 . click to specify the line end point. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection. 18 Click OK. click Name. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. under Specify a new Work Plane. and specify Level : Level 2. and after the intersection snap displays. This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared. and after the intersection snap displays. 17 In the Work Plane dialog. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. For Plane.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. right-click in the drawing area. select Level 2. under Graphics. a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. and click View Properties. However. Notice that the Lines tool remains active. for Underlay. 25 Using the same method. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines. 22 With the Lines tool active. draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile.The line is created. The line displays. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

click Sprinkler. 30 On the Options Bar. Next. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 .26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them. 29 In the Type Selector. you place a sprinkler. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent. 31 With the view zoomed. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and after the mid point snap displays. click to place the sprinkler.

click both reference lines. click (Copy). for Underlay. you delete the reference lines. and then press Delete. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. select the sprinkler that you placed. NOTE When placing sprinklers. The selected sprinkler displays in red. This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. 37 On the Edit toolbar. The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. you continue placing sprinklers. under Graphics. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 33 While pressing CTRL. Next. Next. select None. 34 Right-click in the drawing area.32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Next. you delete the reference lines. and click OK. and click View Properties. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area.

Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . and after the intersection snap displays. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). 40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. and after the intersection snap displays. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. 38 On the Options Bar. click to specify the copy end point. 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. and that Copy is selected. 41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. click to specify the copy start point. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor.

Next. click to specify the copy start point. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. 46 On the Options Bar. and select Multiple. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. verify that Copy is selected. 47 In Office 6. 43 Enter ZR. click (Copy).TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. and after the intersection snap displays. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 45 On the Edit toolbar. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7. and after the intersection snap displays. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 .

specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.49 Move the cursor directly down. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays.

select Last. you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. to specify array end point. You first specify an array start point. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). 51 While pressing CTRL. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 . select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. Next. click Modify. 52 On the Edit toolbar. creating an array is a 2-step process. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. it is an ideal situation to use an array. For Move To. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). click (Array). Furthermore. 50 On the Design Bar. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 53 On the Options Bar.The sprinklers are placed. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool.

and after the intersection snap displays. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. click to specify the array end point as shown. and after the intersection snap displays. Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the array start point.54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler.

you place sprinklers in Office 8. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 .The Office 7 sprinklers are placed. 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next.

drag the cursor to the lower-right. click Check None.57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. 58 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and draw a pick box around Office 6. Notice that all elements in the 2 . select Sprinklers. 59 In the Filter dialog. 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.

or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. or by selecting individual components. 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. click to specify the copy start point. click (Copy). adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8. by cross-picking (drag right to left). 62 Using the mouse scroll wheel. you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). 60 On the Edit toolbar. IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). If the selection contains an unwanted component.The Office 6 sprinklers are selected. and after the mid point snap displays. you can clear it by filtering. clear Multiple. 61 On the Options Bar.

64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8. click to specify the copy end point. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. and after the mid point snap displays.

Open 2. 68 On the Options Bar. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown. Remember to watch for the intersection snap. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . 69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area. click (Copy). you place sprinklers in the large common space. Next. click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection. Open 2.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices. 66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array. verify that Multiple is cleared. 67 On the Edit toolbar.

Next. 74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. For Move To. select 2nd. You could copy sprinklers. enter 6 for the number of arrays. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 73 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that Constrain is cleared. but creating an array is quicker. 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied. click (Array). you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 72 On the Edit toolbar. For Number.The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2.

Zoom out to display the array.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. For more information about arrays. This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. refer to Help. you create multiple arrays based on this array. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . and after the intersection snap displays. Next. click to specify the array end point as shown. 76 While pressing CTRL. This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point. If you make a mistake placing the array. undo the step and try again. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. The array is created.

click to specify end point for the second array. verify that 2nd is selected. enter 4 for number of arrays. click (Array). 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection. Verify that Constrain is cleared. For Move To. 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. For Number. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 77 On the Edit toolbar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. and after the intersection snap displays. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 78 On the Options Bar.If you need to remove an object from a selection.

The sprinkler family loads into the project.The arrays are created. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. you need to load them in the project. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. However. click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 . first. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder. To modify a family type. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. you will use non-hosted sprinklers. click the Training Files icon. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. Because this room does not have a ceiling. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file.

double-click 2 . and click Element Properties from the context menu. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall. and while pressing CTRL. select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. you change the sprinkler offsets. A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. 91 In the Project Browser. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. 88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room. and using the listening dimensions for reference. enter ZR.Fire Prot to make it the active view. move the cursor toward the right wall. 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. select both sprinklers. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms).Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. under Constraints. and click OK. 87 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2 . Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. 95 In the Project Browser. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room. You can also right-click. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall. enter 2900 mm. 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. 94 In the Element Properties dialog. click Sprinkler. Next. 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Properties).Ceiling Fire Prot. for Offset. and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 93 On the Options Bar. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler.

■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. click File menu ➤ Save. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. 98 In the Save As dialog. Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. In this exercise. enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name. you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 . and click Save. Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned. navigate to the folder of your choice. 97 If you want to save your work.

and double-click 2 . You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. sprinklers. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. it would be considered empty. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. click System Browser. after you placed the sprinklers. So. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you also convert and place pipe fittings. a Default system category would not contain any system components. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). As you assign sprinklers to systems. and physically with piping. click in the drawing area to make it active. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Prot to make it the active view. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. After creating the logical connection. Thus. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. During this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. However. If the System Browser does not respond. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. then press F9. if all system components are assigned. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. click the Training Files icon. In the next exercise. Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. modify pipe branches. 1 In the Project Browser. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.

select Sprinklers. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. 7 In the Filter box. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 . You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. 6 On the Options Bar. Notice that all elements within the 2 . click Check None. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and click OK.

8 On the Options Bar. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. and will be considered empty. Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. After you assign the remaining sprinklers. Notice that after you click . Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. After placing a system component. place the cursor over a sprinkler. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. press Tab. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and select the system. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. Next.Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and click Select to select the system. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 14 On the Options Bar. and select solution 2. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. This listing represent the system that you just created. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 . and click Select. verify that Solutions is selected. Click (Next Solution). and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. expand Piping. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. right-click Fire Protection Wet. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers.

IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 20 Click OK. or architecture. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. For Offset. 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. A drag control displays. structural beams. Next. verify that Main is selected. verify that 2750. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.Next. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. 18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. select Branch. click Modify.0 is specified. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings. You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. you modify the layout path.

click Finish Layout. Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 . drag the main to the left as shown.24 Using the drag control. 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

Next. under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. select a different layout solution.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. 27 Enter VG. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser. Always check pipe connectivity after modification. and are not part of the system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. and the system remains. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted.

do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Rooms. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 . press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. Walls. Stairs. and after it highlights. Railings. and Windows. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler.28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Roofs. Under Visibility. enter ZR. Doors. 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. and click to select them. Ceilings. Lines. 29 Click OK. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. The building elements are hidden. Floors. clear Casework.

35 Enter ZR. 33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements. and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .32 While pressing SHIFT. 34 Enter ZF. the logical (system) connection is still intact. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection. to zoom out the view to fit the window. The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled). Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted.

Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection.Next. Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 . These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. Notice that 2 plus signs display. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context.

This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. 38 Select the tee fitting. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . A minus sign displays.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation.

40 Select the elbow fitting. Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 . and click the left plus sign. 39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting.TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.

click to specify the pipe start point. if a connector snap does not display. 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. When drawing pipe. Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and after the end point snap displays. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. If you pause briefly. click Pipe. 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. . use the end point snap. use the connector snap. pipe fittings. or equipments. When connecting pipe to some elements. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . to quickly and accurately locate a connector. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe. Next. you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. . 43 Using the mouse scroll wheel.

and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. TIP When drawing pipe. and as the listening dimensions display. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe.45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. 47 Continue to draw the pipe. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. 46 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 .

50 On the Options Bar.The pipe segment is created. and after the pipe segment highlights. place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. Next. press Tab 3 times. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view. click (Connect Into). you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and select the pipe segment that you just drew.

you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. press TAB the required number of times. When pipes and fittings are connected. fittings. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. you validate the piping geometry. then you know that a disconnect exists. The first time you press Tab. and equipment. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. click to select them. indicating that they are physically connected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. zoom in on the pipe and fittings. and after the objects highlight.The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. If the entire network does not highlight. Next. 52 Using the same method. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected. you can click to select them. The lower section of the pipe run displays in red. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 . allowing you to better see the connections. Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view.

click . 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser. 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. 57 In the Filter dialog. The pipe branch and fittings are deleted. clear Sprinklers. 56 On the Options Bar. and after it highlights. and click Delete. right-click. double-click 2 .Fire Prot to make it the active view. and click OK. This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run.

and after it highlights. clear Sprinklers. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. and after it highlights. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 . Both selected branches display in red. including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. 61 With the branch selected.59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. 62 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. click . including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. select the highlighted pipe branch. place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. 63 On the Options Bar. 60 Click to select the branch. 64 In the Filter dialog.

65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. and click OK. click . you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler. Next. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. 67 On the Options Bar.This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. Next. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. 382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. clear Sprinklers. 68 In the Filter dialog.

verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector. select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler. 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler. click to connect to the sprinkler. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. and click Draw Pipe. 71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe.70 In Open 2. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. 72 In the Type Selector. and after the centerline snap displays. 73 Zoom the view.

The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. and press TAB twice. Next. click (Connect Into). you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. you check connectivity. 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch. Next. 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch. 77 On the Options Bar. 76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). 78 Using the same method. and select the pipe segment that you just drew.The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected.

press TAB twice. and then click to select the highlighted objects. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 . However. you make additional pipe modifications. 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch. You need to connect these sprinklers. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 81 Check connectivity. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. and after it highlights. These sprinklers are not physically connected. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected. Next. Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe.The entire pipe branch highlights. including sprinklers and pipe fittings.

the connection continues to display for easy reference. 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors. These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. If you move the cursor. You need to resolve the disconnects. and sprinklers display in red. branch. and after the connector snap displays. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. 84 Enter ZR.The connected main. you can click to select all highlighted objects. making them easier to view. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This indicates 2 disconnects. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. 86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment. TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. The highlighted objects display in red.

NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 . 90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. select the object as the trim/extend start point. then select the object as the trim/extend end point. 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect. 88 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect.TIP When dragging a pipe connector. Instead of dragging the pipe connector. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active. First. As always. or in resolving disconnects. 89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point. use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool.

you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run. 93 Check connectivity. 388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. indicating that they are connected. The main and branches highlight. Next.The 2 pipe segments connect.

enter ZR. You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view. 96 In the Project Browser. including the sprinkler to the right.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. the active view is tiled to the left. Next. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown. the active view is the only open window. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously. and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. TIP When you tile 2 views. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 .Fire Prot view active. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. 95 With the 2 . 97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable.

101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. First. and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. 100 In the 2 . click Pipe Fitting. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. select Fine for Detail Level. Next. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. and after the mid point snap displays. 104 Zoom in on the tee.Fire Prot view. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. you place an endcap on the tee.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. click to place the endcap. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. select the elbow. Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog. 103 In the Type Selector.

106 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 107 Place the cursor over the endcap. and after it highlights. press TAB once. validate the endcap geometry. The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected. 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 .

Next. As stated earlier in this exercise. and click OK.109 In the 2 . 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. pipe. their connectors are located in their actual location. clear Sprinklers. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting. draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch. use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium. 392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . in single line display. However. 111 In the 3D Fire Prot view. and pipe fittings display in red. all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form. you modify the sprinkler branch connection. click .Fire Prot view. The sprinkler. The pipes and fittings display in single line. So. 112 On the Options Bar. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. 113 In the Filter dialog. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection.

zoom in and select the left pipe segment. You need to resolve the disconnect. 116 On the Options Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 . release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch.Fire Prot view. click . 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right. and after the connector snap displays.115 Select the sprinkler. 117 In the 2 . and all pipe fittings are automatically added. and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler. The sprinkler connects into the pipe.

120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32. notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room. Next. Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . you remove the pipe above Server Room 32. The dry fire protection system will service the server room. You will check connectivity later in this exercise. However. You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. You can validate the geometry in the 3D view. Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment.Fire Prot view. and press Delete. 394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice.Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting. You resolved the disconnect. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31).

121 Enter ZR. 123 Zoom out. This closes the left pipe segment end. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection. Next. and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . convert the tee to an elbow. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run. and check connectivity. 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned.

finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown. You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry. 124 In the 3D view.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. 396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you connect the lower conference room sprinklers. validate the pipe geometry. Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. Next.

Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). check connectivity. and so on) are logically connected by a system. Select Multiple. or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. Next. close the 3D Fire Prot view. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. For Number of Elements. select a pipe segment. and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and number of elements in the system. 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar.Fire Prot view. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. fitting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name. boilers. verify that None is specified. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled. air terminals. 131 On the Options Bar. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. mechanical equipment. 128 In the 2 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. verify that 30 is specified. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. radiators. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. click Add To System.Remember to resolve disconnects. system equipment. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. such as VAV boxes. and maximize the 2 . and pipe or duct is created. and AC units. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. you can select the pipe or duct. Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). For System Equipment.Fire Prot view.

The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system. 398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click Finish. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building. click Finish System. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. 134 On the Options Bar. 133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. The selected sprinklers display in red. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). You cannot select them.This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. expand Piping. you confirm the system in the System Browser. and click Expand All. right-click Fire Protection Wet. 139 Under Systems. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. Next. Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section. click System Browser. Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed. and click Select. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. 140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system.

The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. Click . NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems. 143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar. and select solution 5. verify that Solutions is selected. ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you physically connect these sprinklers with piping. After placing system components. Next. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and select a newly added sprinkler. The Layout Path tool activates. TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. 144 On the Options Bar. not piping which is the physical connection. 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main. 147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 150 Click OK. click Settings. Next. 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. For Offset. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. select Branch. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Main is selected. click Finish Layout. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 145 On the Options Bar. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches.0 is specified. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run. verify that 2750.

402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run.The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. and validate the geometry. you complete the pipe run. check connectivity. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches. Remember to resolve disconnects. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting. Next.

click (Copy). you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. Open the m Creating the Dry System. click the Training Files icon. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. 1 In the Project Browser. After creating the system. and double-click 2 . click File menu ➤ Save. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. In the next exercise. 154 In the Save As dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. and click Save. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. Connectivity was checked. you create the dry fire protection system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Finally. and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. As with the wet system. 153 If you want to save your work. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar. you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications. enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers.

7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. click to specify the copy start point. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared.5 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Copy is selected.

11 In the Type Selector. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. The System Browser opens. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. Next. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers. while pressing CTRL. 10 While pressing CTRL. you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. select both sprinklers. select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 13 Under Systems. Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. 14 In the drawing area. you change the sprinkler type. Next. You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 .9 Click Modify. click System Browser.

click Pipe. you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 24 On the Options Bar. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. click the sprinklers to it. In the System Browser.15. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. Next. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. right-click. double-click 2 . and click Select. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click . 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and click Select The selected system displays in red. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. sprinkler size. 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category.Fire Prot to make it the active view. you can view system information including flow. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser. 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and for each sprinkler. click Options. and after the intersection snap displays. verify that 15mm is selected. for Slope Angle. 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. verify that 2750. You have confirmed and validated the system. and click OK. and so on. Each selected sprinkler displays in red. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Layout Options dialog.15 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32. For Offset.0 is specified. 23 On the Options Bar. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty. 22 In the Type Selector. enter 0. Next. 21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. The sprinklers are logically connected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system.

and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 . click . 30 On the Options Bar. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. Next. and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. 29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler.27 Draw the pipe run to the right. Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

37 On the Edit toolbar. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. and press TAB 3 times. click Options. indicating that they are connected. 31 Zoom the view. expand 3D views. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Create Similar). To follow good design practice. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes.The sprinkler connects into the pipe. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. 35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. Next. you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe. Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. under Fire Protection. Next. You can click the slope control to change the slope direction. 38 On the Options Bar. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry.

enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. or by right-clicking a connector. This clears the slope. if you use the Create Similar tool. Then. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. First.39 In the Layout Options dialog. and click Add. Additionally. 42 Check connectivity. In this exercise. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. . select Count. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. navigate to the folder of your choice. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Click OK. checked pipe connectivity. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. After the system was completed. enter 0. click Schedule/Quantities. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. However. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. you placed dry system sprinklers. select Sprinklers. 4 Under Available fields. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. for Slope Angle. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. 43 In the Save As dialog. In this case. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. You have completed the dry fire protection system. select Family and Type. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected. and click Save. do the following: ■ Under Category. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe. and click OK. and click Add to add the field to the list.

Fire Prot to make the view active. You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. Select Grand totals. you modify the pipe diameters. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. TIP When you tile 2 views. select it. and double-click 2. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. Click OK twice. For Then by. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. select Family and Type. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows. 5 Select a field. and click Remove. you tile the floor plan and 3D views.If you need to remove a field from the list. Next. and that it is sorted according to family and type. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. verify that (none) is selected. and clear Itemize every instance. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. Verify that Ascending is selected. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. the active view is tiled to the left. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule.

height. Changing the diameter. click . 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. or height. and while pressing SHIFT. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . 14 In the Filter dialog. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run. width. width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. or width. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. starting at the upper-left corner of the building.Fire Prot view. click Check None. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run.

412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . select 25mm.16 On the Options Bar. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. verifying that it is connected. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe. you modify the diameter the main. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. For D: (diameter). and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. and press TAB twice. 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. Next. 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment.

you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 . 20 With the main selected. while pressing CTRL. and the supply pipe. the pipe fittings. If branch segments are selected.NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. The selected main pipe displays in red. draw a pick box around the horizontal main.

while pressing SHIFT. 22 In the 3D view. 414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. The diameter of the fire protection main changes. so you need to exclude the supply pipe. select 100mm.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. and on the Options Bar. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry. select the supply pipe. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. for D:. especially around the pipe fittings. 24 In the 3D view. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that the diameter is 150mm.

Fire Prot view to make it active. 27 Enter ZR. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 . You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 . 28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers.

30 Select the next pipe segment to the right. Click Tags. zoom in on the branch that you modified. under Category. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler. Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . you continue to modify the pipe branch. 29 On the Options Bar. you will complete the branch diameter modification. 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. and 2 in the open space). for D:. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. The pipe diameter is modified.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. click Tag ➤ By Category. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. and click to select them. This segment services 5 sprinklers. Clear Leader. click to place the tag. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. 33 On the Options Bar. select 40mm to comply with the design criteria. Next. The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. and after the segment highlights. 36 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. You can verify this selection in the 3D view.Fire Prot view. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. for D:. 38 Click OK. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings. Later in this exercise. for D:. Next. for Pipes. select 50mm. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 37 In the Tag dialog. select 40mm.

you place a tag and include a leader line. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 . and finish placing the pipe tags.NOTE Tags are view specific. Next. select Leader. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. 40 On the Options Bar. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Next. 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows).

you created a wet and a dry fire protection system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. In this tutorial. In the lesson. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Finally. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. each system was completely different. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. and click Save. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. navigate to the folder of your choice.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Sprinklers Serviced 1. you tagged the pipes. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. In this exercise. and finish tagging the pipes. 2 3 4. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. Finally.

lofty ceilings. and a roof garden.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. exterior fire stairs. 419 . you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section.

slight modifications to the building design have been made. 420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects .NOTE For training purposes.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 . you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial. elevation. including plan. section.

You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You learn how to create new views from existing views. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create views from a building model. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to create section and elevation views.Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

8 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 . 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files. and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. expand Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. select Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click Vicinity Plan. under Floor Plans. Next. click the current scale. and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. 11 Under Floor Plans.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.16 Right-click.rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select1:100. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. under Floor Plans. select Elevation: Building Elevation. double-click Level 1. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 3 In the Type Selector. click Elevation.

8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 In the Project Browser. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. click Modify. enter South East. double-click South East. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. under Elevations.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

select Section: Building Section. for Scale. expand Floor Plans. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 15 On the Options Bar.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). select 1:100. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. and double-click Level 1. ■ Move the cursor down. 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.

and click to place it. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 . 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Sections (Building Section). View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click Section 1.21 On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views | 431 .Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.rvt. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar.

select 1:50. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click Callout. double-click Level 1. and specify a point to complete the callout. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. and select the callout boundary. 4 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. select Floor Plan. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. for Scale. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views | 433 . The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. click Modify. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 7 On the Design Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.■ Select the middle grip. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50. click Callout. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Detail View: Detail. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 1. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Callout Views | 435 . expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. the elevation markers. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.

and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click Training Files. click Load into Project. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.rvt. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select Custom-Section Head. click the Annotation Objects tab.rfa. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 . for Section Head. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll to Section Line. clear any others. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 15 Under Category. click Edit/New. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK twice.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. . The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. double-click Level 1. 12 For Section Tag. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. and click OK.Custom. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. select the current project. enter Section Head – Custom. 8 In the Name dialog. select Section Head . click Duplicate. and can be applied to the section line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Section Tail – Filled. Section Tail . under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. 10 On the floor plan. select the section line.Filled.

enter 12. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Under Category. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. click Load into Project. and click Open. On the floor plan. and click OK. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.5mm Square. select Custom-Callout Head. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New. 30 On the Design Bar. 19 Click OK. enter 12. Click OK.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. clear all others. select 12. and on the Options Bar. For Line Weight. select the current project. 27 Click OK twice. and select 2. and select 3. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. . 23 In the Type Properties dialog. On the floor plan. and click OK. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select Square. select 3. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.rfa. scroll to Section Marks.5mm Square. for Elevation Tag. For Dimensions ➤ Width. click Training Files. open Metric\Families\Annotations.5 mm. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.

49 Click OK. . 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Dash. Click OK. enter 6 mm. enter . 47 Select Callout Leader Line. click Edit/New. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. and on the Options Bar. expand Callout Boundary. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 34 In the Name dialog. and select 4. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. For Corner Radius. 43 Under Category. 40 Press ESC. select . Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. and select 7. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 46 Under Category. select the callout. 45 For Line Pattern. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . 39 Click OK twice.33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 36 In the drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag.

masking regions. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. You learn to create view templates. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and apply it to multiple elevation views. under Elevations. The crop region displays as red. Creating a View Template In this exercise. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. To accomplish this. view regions. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. filters. and double-click East. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Training Files. and visual overrides. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 6 On the Project Browser. under Elevations. 8 Click OK. under Extents. right-click East. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 Under Visibility. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Zoom to Fit. clear Crop Region Visible. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . clear Entourage. 4 On the Design Bar. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 5 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

15 On the View Control bar. 20 In the Project Browser. click OK. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. under Elevations. under Elevations. 17 In the New View Template dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and click Create View Template From View. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 19 In the Project Browser. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. levels. click Apply. right-click East. 18 In the View Templates dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.14 Click OK. grids. elevation markers. right-click North. and click OK. double-click North. 16 In the Project Browser. Callouts. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

rvt.rvt. for View Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. right-click. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Bottom. under Extents. double-click Penthouse. Under View Depth. Click OK twice. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . click Edit. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Level Below (Level 4). You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Level Below (Level 4). for Level.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Project Browser. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. and click Properties. select Penthouse. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

6 In the Project Browser.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Edit. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for View Range. for Bottom. Click OK twice. under Extents. right-click. select Level 4. for Level. Under View Depth. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof Plan. select Level 4.

and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). In the left corner of the building. click Modify. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Lines. for View Range. for Bottom. 10 On the Design Bar. for Level. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit. click Region Property. Move you cursor diagonally. click Plan Region. under Extents. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Click OK twice. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 . Under View Depth.

expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. in this case. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After you apply the filter. under Filters. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). select Walls. enter Rated Walls. under Categories. select Fire Rating. click the Filters tab. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 5 In the Filters dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. click Edit/New. 7 In the Filters dialog. and click OK.rvt. click (New).

11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. 9 Click OK. select the red color. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. under Basic colors. click Override under Patterns. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. and click OK. for Pattern. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. for Color. 12 On the Filter tab. click OK. To accomplish this.■ ■ Select contains. 14 In the Color dialog. Enter Hr. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 10 On the Filter tab. 16 Click OK. for Rated Walls. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Remove. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Add. under Projection/Surface. click No Override. select Solid Fill. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

5 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Floor Plans. as shown. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.

11 In the Type Selector.7 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. select Invisible lines. 8 Select the crop region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 449 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click (Rectangle). click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.Level 1.14 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Floor Plans. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Rename. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. select Walls. right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. click No Override. and click Override. for Color. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 Under Cut. under Pattern Overrides. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. select Solid fill. click the current scale. for Pattern. and click OK. and click OK. and click 1: 50. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Visibility. click in the Patterns field. click black.

15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Floors. 452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Grids.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 453 . 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click.

for Color. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select the sofa. for Pattern. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Projection Lines. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click OK twice. 23 In the Color dialog. click Override. under Lines. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK. click a purple color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select a bright green color.20 Right-click. 28 For Color. select Dash. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. right-click. click No Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click By Category Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 25 Click OK twice.

click . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click Modify.30 On the Design Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. The hidden crop region is also revealed. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. right-click. click . Working with Visual Overrides | 455 . 33 On the View Control Bar.

click Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.34 Click File menu ➤ Save.Creating Sheets. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to add views to the sheets. and click OK. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. click Training Files. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. select A0 metric. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. right-click.

click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. For Sheet Number. 5 When the title block highlights. expand Sheets (all). Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 . click Modify. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. enter A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). on the Options Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block. enter Site Plan. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.Unnamed.

enter 15 May. click Edit. For Client Name. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter J. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Number.■ Click OK. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 2007. click Modify. For Project Status. For Project Name. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 In the Edit Text dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter For Approval. enter 2007-1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. under Other. MA 12345 12 Click OK. Smith. for Project Address.

Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select Level 1. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Stairs In the following exercise. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to these sheets. double-click A102 .rvt.rvt.Elevations A105 . select A0 metric.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Elevations A106 . enter Floor Plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Save. and click to place the view.Layout Plan A104 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . for Name. and click OK. under Floor Plans.Sections A108 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. and drag it to the sheet. and click Rename. 4 On the Design Bar. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Elevations A107 .Floor Plan. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click. click Modify. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Sheets (all). 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK.

6 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. double-click A104 .Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it.The red border around the view no longer displays. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. align it with the East elevation. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

10 Under Sections (Building Sections). select 1:5.Sections. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 . click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). for View Scale. . 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. and click to place it. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 16 Select title bar.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. double-click A107 . under Sheets (all). Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.

View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Sheets (all). Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. under Floor Plans. and click to place it. zoom in to the grip.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights. 19 On the Design Bar. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Stairs. click Modify. 21 Zoom to the stair callout.

you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 .rvt. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and then make changes and deactivate the view.Sections. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. In order to do this.

and click Activate View. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. enter 16700 mm. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.2 Select the building section view. double-click North. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. right-click. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. 6 Right-click. and press ENTER. 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Camera. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rvt. select the new sheet name. 3 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. The camera view displays. double-click Level 1. and click OK. You modify the view to hide the view title. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 . 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. enter Title Sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Click OK. right-click. For Sheet Name. 7 Place the camera as shown. and click Properties. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. enter T. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.

click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. double-click T . For Far Clip Offset. Under Extents. enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation. select Far Clip Active. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 14 Under 3D Views. enter100000 mm.Title Sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 1500 mm. 466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Camera. for Eye Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser.

15 With the view selected. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Model Crop Size. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and then click OK. on the Options Bar. select No. 22 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 25 On the Design Bar. enter 635 mm. and on the Options Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . and click OK. for Show title. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. . for Height. click Duplicate. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. under Graphics. click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. Click Apply. 24 Click OK twice.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

such as room and window schedules. 469 . such as doors and windows. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial. You also learn to create different types of schedules. in your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.rvt. and click Room and Area. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.Level 1. click Room Separation.Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Because of the open style floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.

as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 .4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Training Files. 15 On the Design Bar. and select the room tag. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .rfa. and click to place the room and tag. 9 In the Tags dialog. and the rectangle contains the room tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 In the Tags dialog. click OK. click Modify. The room tag number displays in blue. click Load. indicating that it can be edited. click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Room.

and press ENTER. click Room. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 . 18 On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. enter Entry. click Modify. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter U18-1. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.16 Zoom in on the tag number. Click to place the new room and tag. click it. and press ENTER. 17 Click the room text label.

20 On the Design Bar.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 21 Click the room text label. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and press ENTER. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Dining. enter Kitchen.

30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Model Categories tab. but they need to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 .24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 2. 28 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. in the Project Browser.rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags. click Modify. and click OK. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. double-click Unit 18 Plan . The rooms are already placed. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. expand Floor Plans.rvt. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. and moving clockwise. under Floor Plans. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 1. click Room Tag. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Room Separation. 26 On the Design Bar.

click (Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. and click OK. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter U18-1. for Mark. enter U18-2. and press ENTER. and on the Options Bar. under Identify Data. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left.

and drag it down to center it in the doorway.Level 2. under Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 . Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. 13 On the Design Bar.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and click OK. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

and click OK. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. and double-click Level 1. 19 In the Tags dialog. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click Training Files.rfa. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Load. 21 Click OK. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. select Window.

28 Select Window Tags.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 27 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 5 At the confirmation prompt.rvt. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.Level 1. select Leader. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . 4 Select a dining room chair. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Training Files. 26 On the View toolbar. 25 Under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. and modify the tag placement and display. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. double-click Level 2. Zoom flyout. and click OK. click Yes to load a tag. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged.

clear Leader. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click the elbow control. 11 Select the tag for the table. 14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and on the Options Bar. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and drag it above the chair tag. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 9 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). and drag it up to form an angled leader.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 13 Optionally.

Tagging Other Objects | 481 . select M_Furniture tag : Standard. click (Filter Selection). 18 On the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged.Level 2. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. and click OK. click Modify. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan .16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. under Floor Plans.

you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tags. click Check None.21 In the Filter dialog. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 22 In the Type Selector. you learn to add schedules. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. and click Modify. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

Finally. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. that is.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in which windows are listed by window type. Next. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 . a schedule that lists every window in the building. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule.rvt.

click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Using the same method. 4 For Name. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. enter Building Window Schedule. 6 Under Available fields. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. 9 Click OK.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Windows. click the Fields tab. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Comments and click Add. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. NOTE By clicking Show. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Show. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. in large building models with many views. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. under Other. select Type Mark. and click View Properties. this can be a time-consuming process. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. for Sorting/Grouping. for Sort by. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 . 13 In the Project Browser. However. right-click the schedule. click Close. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. If no open view shows the selected element. and click OK twice. you are prompted to open one that does.

click Edit. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. clear Itemize every instance. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule.The window schedule is displayed. double-click Level 2. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 22 Click OK twice. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Sorting/Grouping. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. sorted by type mark. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. The window type schedule is displayed.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.rvt. select Type. for Name. expand Schedules/Quantities. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 . These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. select Construction. and sill conditions for a window can be found. For Group parameter under. For Discipline. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. jamb. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. and double-click Building Window Schedule. unlike shared parameters. enter Head Detail. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Add to create the new parameter. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Under Parameter Data. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. In this case. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. you cannot use them to tag objects. 5 Click OK. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object.

click Group. under Available fields. enter Window Details. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Jamb Detail. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. TIP To select all 3 headers. for Fields. select the following fields. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. so that they are listed before Comments. right-click Building Window Schedule. select Head Detail. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Properties. and Sill Detail. click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. and while pressing the left mouse button. click in the Head Detail header.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. Verify Schedule building components is selected. Select contains in the second field. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. click the Fields tab.rvt. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. You then hide the column used for the filter. For example. for Head Detail. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and for Sill Detail. enter 3/A107. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Verify the Phase is Phase 1.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. expand Floor Plans. enter 2/A107. under Type Mark A. for Jamb Detail. select the following fields. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Click OK. Under Name. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 . enter 1/A107. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Under Available fields. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. enter Unit 18 . select Doors. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Enter U18 in the third field.Level 1. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser.Door Schedule. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

select Hidden Field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. click Unit 18 . Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Under Field formatting.Unit 18.Door Schedule. select Mark. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and drag it to the sheet. and double-click A102 . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 15 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . but is not included as a column in the schedule. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Under Fields.

add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. under Category. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. and click OK.rvt. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. under Available fields. and click View. 5 Using the same method. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. click Modify. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Rooms. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 8 Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Room Schedule | 491 .Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. select Number. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. under Floor Plans. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 19 On the Design Bar. 7 To the right of Header text. and click Add. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

enter Storage. select Corridor. for room 101. The room Number is U17-9. enter Building Entry. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 101-106. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 103. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 105. click New. select Storage. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. for Name. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. enter Corridor. and press ENTER.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. next to Rows. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 104. add 5 more rooms. For 102. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule.

3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Room Separation. For Room Separation. and modify room names. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. double-click Level 1. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK.■ For 106. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. In the Lines field. In the Line Graphics dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Projection/Surface. place rooms from a program list. click the Color field. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Override. select 9. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan.rvt. you add room separation lines. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click the bright green swatch. enter Stair. and press ENTER. For Weight. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. expand Lines. click the Lines field. Under Custom colors.

click Room. First.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. 494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.

enter 2400 mm. 12 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 . select 102 Storage. 10 On the Options Bar. for Room. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). select 101 Building Entry. 13 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room.

These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Floor Plans. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 16 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. double-click Level 1. 18 In the Project Browser. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Room Schedule. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the Corridor.

29 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. enter As Selected. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 Select Schedule keys. Floor Finish. and for all 3 finishes. select Base Finish. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. under Constraints. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. while pressing CTRL. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and Wall Finish. under Available fields. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click New to add a new row. clear Room Bounding. under Category. and click OK. click (Properties). 25 In the New Schedule dialog.19 While pressing CTRL. enter Units. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 For Key Name. The Room Style Schedule displays without data.

and click OK. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 39 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click (Filter Selection). click Room Style. click Zoom To Fit. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 37 Under U17-8. 32 In the Project Browser. for Fields. and click Add. under Schedules/Quantities. select Rooms. 35 Click OK twice. select Units. right-click Room Schedule. for Room Style. 42 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. click Edit. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser.31 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. 36 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Available fields. Zoom flyout. and click Properties. under Other. 41 On the Options Bar. add 2 more key names: Service and Public.

select Service. under Floor Plans. 45 In the Project Browser. 103. select Public. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Room Style. expand Floor Plans. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. enter Room Type. For rooms 102 and 105. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . and apply it to the Level 1 view. and click Properties. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Name. 9 In the Project Browser. 104. click OK.rvt. at the warning prompt. select Room Type. click (Properties). double-click Room Schedule.43 On the Options Bar. 6 For Color. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Views (all). and 106. 5 For Title. select Units. enter Room Type. click (Duplicate). under Identity Data. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK. for Room Style. and double-click Level 1. right-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Color Scheme field.

expand Lines. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK twice. click Edit. for Display Color Fill in. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). and click OK. clear Visible. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Custom color. select Foreground. click Edit Color Scheme. click Modify. and clear Room Separation. select blue. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select the color legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. click Color Scheme Legend.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Color dialog. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . enter 25 mm. enter 5 mm.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK. under Graphics. for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Under Title Text. and click OK twice. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. on the Options Bar. (Properties). click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Swatch Width.

502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.29 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. click Modify. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. double-click {3D}.

Select Grand totals. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. Clear Itemize every instance. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.EPDM. 9 Using the same method. under Category. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 12 Click OK. 5 On the Design Bar.3 While pressing CTRL. select Material: Description. and click OK. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click Modify. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. click Family and Type. For Then by. select Roofs. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 11 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type. and click Add. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Area.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting.

enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. 21 Click the Formatting tab. under Available fields. select Calculate totals. and click Properties. for the Material: Cost field. for Name.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.80 5. 20 Click OK. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .40 50. and click OK twice. click Estimated Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. under Other. for Fields. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 For Field formatting. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. click Material: Cost. and click Add. 23 In the Material Takeoff. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and under Fields. and click Properties. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 17 Click Calculated Value. enter Estimated Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 For Formula. click Edit.

In this lesson. click Edit. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 27 Click Field Format. tag the line. 28 Click OK 3 times. click Training Files. You draw a travel path line. click Estimated Cost. These shared parameters can be added to any family. regardless of category. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you create a shared parameter file. select 2 decimal places. for Formatting. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and reporting the shared parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. adding the shared parameters to a family.25 In the Element Properties dialog. For Units. under Fields.rvt. For Rounding. either within family components or within the project template. select Fixed. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you create an exiting plan for the building. and are defined and stored in an external file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 .

2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 11 Click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. for Name. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 7 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click Create. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. for File name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. for Name. enter Exiting. enter Travel Distance. and click Save. select Length. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. under Floor Plans. for Name. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click New. click Training Files. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. enter Path ID. under Groups. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters.1 In the Project Browser.txt. and click OK.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.

11 In the Family Types dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. following the equals symbol (=). and click OK. select Shared parameter. 14 If necessary. and click OK. and click Select. 12 Click Apply. under Dimensions. under Parameters. If you have multiple projects open. select Constraints. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Add. for Travel Distance Formula. under Parameters. 8 Select Instance. 7 For Group parameter under. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . group it under Dimensions. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. otherwise the family loads into the current project. enter Length.rvt.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. Click Training Files. and select Instance. click Load into Projects. and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.rfa. click Family Types. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. in the Load into Projects dialog.

click Add. click Training Files. 19 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. click Select. 26 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.rft. and click Open. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog.rft. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 17 Select Generic Tag. and click OK 3 times. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Label. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Travel Distance.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 . under Floor Plans.Tagging. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.Tagging. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. Placing. 31 On the Design Bar.27 In the drawing window.rfa. for File Name. After the lines are tagged. 30 In the Save As dialog. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.rvt. and press DELETE. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID. and click Save. Placing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK.rvt is selected.Level 1. double-click Exiting Plan . click Load into Projects. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. and move it down. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.

4 On the Options Bar. above the exterior door as shown.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. 510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Move the cursor to the right. click Component. select Chain. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.

9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click (Properties). 13 While pressing CTRL. and click outside of the building.Tagging. 8 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. and click OK. clear Leader. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . for Path ID. double click Exiting Plan . 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. enter 1-1.Level 2. verify that Chain is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. click Component. through the door. Placing.7 Move the cursor down. under Constraints. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

click Component. and click. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. move the cursor to the left. and click above the door to the stair. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor near the right corner. 22 Click at the center starting point.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar.

27 On the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 33 For Name. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.Tagging. and click OK. (Properties). 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 2-1. and click in the stair. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . click Tag ➤ By Category.23 Move the cursor down. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Path ID. click Modify. under Category. Placing. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.

enter 1-. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. in the second field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. click Schedule/Quantities. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. while pressing CTRL. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Path ID and Travel Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. click Training Files. and under Field formatting. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. in the first field. select Calculate Totals. 41 Under Fields. select Travel Distance. and in the third field. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 38 For Sort by. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Path ID. 36 For Filter by. and click Properties. and click Add. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Rename. under Available fields. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Filter. under Schedules/Quantities. 46 In the Project Browser. under Other. 44 In the Project Browser. enter 2-. 45 In the Rename View dialog. select contains. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Edit. for Filter by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 42 Click OK. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 40 Click the Formatting tab. in the third field. right-click the Design Bar. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click Generic . click C1010145 . and click OK. click the Fields tab. and click the browse button. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. click the Value field.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Partitions .152 mm.Fixed Partitions. select Walls. expand C .2 In the New Schedules dialog. for Assembly Code. select the following fields. 4 Under Available fields.Interiors\C10 . under Categories. and click OK twice.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.

1 On the File menu. click OK in the dialog. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. click Training Files.9 In the schedule. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 8 In the New Database dialog. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. and click Next. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click OK to create the database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. under Database Name. and open the database in Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Create. click the File Data Source tab. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 10 When the confirmation displays. and click Next. 3 Click New. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.mdb for Database Name. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. click OK. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Additionally. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 10 Close the exercise file. 9 Under Directories.rvt. enter Revit_Project. under Database. 6 Click Finish.

Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 13 Close the exercise file. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. in addition to the Id column. For example. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 519 .Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. Relocating a Project | 521 . click Training Files. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.Relocating a Project In this exercise.

you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. and double-click South. The levels in the project are not shared. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. By entering 10000 mm in this step. Under Constraints. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Edit/New. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The south elevation is displayed. expand Views (all). enter8 mm Head . 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. select Shared. By selecting the Level 1 line. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter 10000 mm. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. for Elevation Base. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click OK twice. and press ENTER. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm.Shared Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click (Properties). you specify the new location of the project. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. and click OK. If you did that now. However. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. In the Name dialog. 8 Select the Level 1 line. 10 On the View menu. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm.

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 13 On the Design Bar. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. click Modify. select Level : 8 mm Head . under Elevations. Relocating a Project | 523 . 12 In the Type Selector.Shared Elevation. as well as other views of the building model.

Shared Elevation.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. and select Levels 2-4. select Level : 8 mm Head . and the Roof Plan level. the Penthouse level. On the Design Bar. 524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. In the Type Selector.

except when you sketch profiles to complete families. multi-segmented. expand Views (all). “Dimensioning” on page 525. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. click File menu ➤ Save As. Dimensioning In this lesson. permanent dimensions are created automatically. In Revit MEP. In this case. radial.16 If you want to save your changes. and double-click Level 1. You place linear. expand Floor Plans. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. and angular dimensions. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Dimensioning | 525 .

By default.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. click Dimension. dimensions are aligned. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. snap to wall centerlines. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it.

Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 527 .5 Move the cursor above the view. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. click Modify. The lock displays as locked.

16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. select the right side of the curtain wall. select the right endpoint of the planter. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. but below the first dimension that you placed.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. above the plan view of the building. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 17 Move the cursor up. 15 Move the cursor to the right. 12 13 On the Options Bar. select Wall Faces. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and select its left exterior face. for Prefer. 11 Using the same method.

For Prefer. click Dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. Creating Dimensions | 529 . Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 26 Select the radial dimension. click Modify. click Modify.19 On the Basics tab. and select it. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). select Wall faces. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . on the Options Bar. for Suffix. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 30 On the Basics tab. 34 Select the horizontal line. verify Wall faces is selected. enter Typ. click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). and click OK.28 With the dimension still selected. For Prefer. click (Properties). click Dimension. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar..

38 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 37 On the Basics tab. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and click to place the dimension. you select only the wall. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 .This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. select Entire Walls. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select Widths. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Pick. Click Options. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Click OK. select Wall centerlines.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. select Openings. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension.

7 On the Basics tab. and click to place the automatic dimension string. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 . expand Views (all). 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533. and double-click Level 1. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. you specify their origin on the Options Bar.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. However. for a multi-segmented dimension. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. in some cases. When you place dimensions. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. click Modify. expand Floor Plans.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. For example. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select Individual References. 7 Using the same method. move the cursor down. verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. select the right edge of the planter.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select it.

Controlling Witness Lines | 535 . and specify a point to place the dimension. and select it. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. 10 Using the same method.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 11 Move the cursor down. select the bottom right endpoint.

536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall centerlines. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. click Dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. select it. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 13 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 16 On the Design Bar.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. for Prefer.

19 Release SHIFT. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. and using the same methods. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 . click Modify. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 20 Release SHIFT. 22 On the Basics tab. After you create the new family type. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537.

Under Text. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select the lower dimension. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. For Text Font. select CityBlueprint.2 mm. click Duplicate. text font.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 5 In the Name dialog. enter 3.dimension tick mark. for Tick Mark. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and click OK. for Text Size. enter Office Standard. 2 Click (Properties). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. select Arrow 30 Degree.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and select the bottom dimension. select another font. ■ Click OK twice. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 7 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Basics tab. click Modify.

create a new angular dimension type. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.11 Using the same method. select the angular dimension on the planter. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson.

for Leader. zoom to planter near grid line 5. click (None). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Text. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. but below the upper dimension string. and click and drag to create a text box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 .Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 11 Under Text. and click . enter 6 mm. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arc Leaders. enter EXISTING BUILDING. If so.5 In the text box. and click OK. 7 Select the text box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. under Graphics. for Text Size. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. 10 In the Name dialog box. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan.

14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 . and enter Planting Bed. click Text. 15 On the Design Bar.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

for Text font. Click OK twice. In the Rename dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Under Graphics. click Modify. select Arrow 30 Degree. click Edit/New. 20 On the Design Bar. Click Rename. and click OK. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. select CityBlueprint. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. enter Standard Notes. click Modify. Under Text.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for New. for Leader Arrowhead. 24 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . over the Planting Bed text. click (Arc). select Text: Standard Notes. click to place the text box. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector. click Text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.

click File menu ➤ Save As.31 Click in the text box. 32 If you want to save your changes. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Wall. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and enter 457 mm Conc.

using detail components to represent materials like lumber. like a standard door header condition. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. These components display at the required scale. 547 . and metal studs. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 9 In this tutorial. plywood.

that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. click Training Files. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components. In order to detail from the building model. region objects. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. After you add components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as well as detail lines. which means that all detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and insulation objects. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you trace over the building model geometry. add detail components.rvt. Detailing the View In this exercise. In the callout view. They are also view specific. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing .

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click . Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.5mm. 13 In the Name dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family.rfa. double-click the detail callout head. Exact location is not important. 7 In the drawing area. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Detail Component. Detailing the View | 549 . click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. enter 406. 8 Delete the component. 5 In the alert dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select As underlay. and click OK. click Repeating Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Corrugated Metal. 17 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. 16 Click OK twice. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 15 For Spacing.

click Detail Component. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. and on the Edit toolbar. click Load. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Modify. ■ Click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. click (Move).18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. and press DELETE.

Detailing the View | 551 . click Training Files. Because you still have several components to load. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 34 In the Type Selector.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click OK.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Detail Component. 31 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. 32 To properly orient the component. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 25 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. and click Open.rfa. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. and place it in the detail view as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

37 Place the wallboard component as shown. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click Insulation. 36 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. 38 Click Modify. 39 Select the horizontal segment.

Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 46 In the Type Selector. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. select to near side. click Detail Component. click (Move). Detailing the View | 553 . Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. as shown. enter 140mm. 43 Click Modify. For Offset. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify.

select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 4 Click Modify. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. as shown. 554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 52 Click Modify. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component.48 In the Type Selector. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. they are view specific. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. meaning they display only in this view. and lock the component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines.

Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 555 . enter 10mm. 10 On the Design Bar. as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. For Offset. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. enter 10mm.

and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 16 On the Options Bar.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 556 | Chapter 9 Detailing . as shown. select Thin Lines. select Chain. draw the detail lines as shown. 18 In the Type Selector. click (Draw). 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. and draw the detail lines as shown.

select the Penthouse level line. For Offset. select Vapor Barrier. 24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Do not display. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. enter 10mm. 26 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 In the Project Browser. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Adding Detail Lines | 557 . right-click Roof Overhang Detail. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. and click Properties. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. right-click.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. When you turn the display model off. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.

Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 32 Click Modify.rvt. click Text. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. you add text notes to complete the detail.29 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing . select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Detail Component. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

2 On the Options Bar. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. and click (Properties). 7 Select the dimension line. for Text ➤ Suffix. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Adding Text Notes | 559 . 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Enter the text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. enter Typ. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Click again to specify the location of the text box.. 6 Click Modify.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. on the Options Bar. select a text note. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. select all the coping linework. and save the exercise file. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof Overhang Detail. “Creating Detail Components” on page 560. right-click.Keynotes. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and press DELETE. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. right-click. enter Roof Overhang Detail . clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. while pressing CTRL. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. click 6 In the Filter dialog. right-click. and click OK. and click OK.rvt. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and selecting the chain. 7 Click Modify.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click Select All Instances. (Filter Selection). pressing TAB.

18 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Roof Edge.rft. 16 Click Modify. 23 Using a window. Creating Detail Components | 561 .9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click OK. and click Open. 24 On the Options Bar. select the coping. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 14 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . click Training Files. 22 Click Modify. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. for File name. and the component can be placed in the detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click . While pressing SHIFT. double-click it in the Project Browser. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 21 To place the component. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 25 In the Filter dialog. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. in the Type Selector. navigate to your preferred location. click Load into Projects. clear Detail Items.Keynotes view is not the open view. The original linework remains selected.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place keynotes on objects. delete the underlying linework. and click OK.B5. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 2 In the alert dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 30 In the drawing area. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing .rvt. “Adding Keynotes” on page 562. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.rfa. 31 Using the same method used previously. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In the Keynotes dialog. click Detail Component. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to place the leader arm. click Load. click Training Files. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 63mm Rigid Insulation. and click Open. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Training Files. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and click Open.26 Press DELETE.rfa.

Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 19mm Plywood. For the 50 x 200. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.C1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. Roof Edge4. Adding Keynotes | 563 . use keynote 06160. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). navigate to 07645. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. click Edit/New.F1.D11. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. click in the Value column. use keynote 09250. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times.F1. click Keynote ➤ Element.D11. use keynote 06160.D1. 6 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. use keynote 07645. For the metal coping. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06110. 12 On the Design Bar. For the 50 x 150. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the metal fascia with drip edge.G1. use keynote 06110.I1.

enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. navigate to your preferred location. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing .20 Ga. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Medium Lines. 6 Lock the line. 5 In the drawing area. 18 Save the file. 9 On the Design Bar. and click Save.14 On the Design Bar. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As.A8. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 8 In the Save As dialog. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select the left end point of the reference line. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. using keynote 07460. click Detail Component. and click Modify. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 17 Keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and select the right end point. for File name. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. click Training Files. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564. select Corrugated Metal. and click Open. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.rft. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You do this in order to keynote the component.

16 Select the component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 30 Click Modify.11 Press DELETE. 27 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click OK. click Duplicate. 24 While pressing CTRL. 29 In the drawing area. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click the end points at the top of the roof. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click in the Value column. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click . and hidden) used in the view. click Load. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 In the Name dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Name dialog. enter EPDM Membrane. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click (Properties). 15 Click Modify. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. invisible. click Edit/New. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 22 On the Options Bar. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. 13 In the Type Selector. and click Open. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. 25 Next. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 28 In the Type Selector.A1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. 31 Select the component.

Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 53 On the Options Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click Detail Component. 46 Click Modify. and click . 44 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 06110. and click .A5. (Move). 47 Select the component. 48 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. and click the lower end at the break line. against the 3/4" plywood. select Chain. 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 41 Select the component just added. 40 Click Modify.G1. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 42 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and assign it keynote 07260.38 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 52 In the Type Selector. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 49 With the component selected. name the component Air Barrier.

A4. leaving the detail component lines. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Keynote ➤ Element. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 50 x 200 Framing. name the component Vapor Barrier. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click . and Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. 60 On the Design Bar.55 Click Modify. 58 Using the method used previously. Air Barrier. 61 In the drawing area.

3 In the text editor. 71 Save the file.rfa. 63 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects. in the Type Selector. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. The database file opens in a text editor.txt. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing .A9. name the component Batt Insul. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and press TAB. and press ENTER. 67 In the drawing area. select the component. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. 69 Using the method used previously. Enter 07460. add a keynote for the component. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. and click . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 70 In the drawing area.A4.. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.rvt. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and assign it keynote 07210. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 68 Select the component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.A1. and close the text editor. Enter 07463. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568. click File menu ➤ Save. and press TAB.rfa.

you learn how to create a drafted detail. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Each keynote displays as a simple number. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. These details do not update with changes to the building model.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. After you create a drafting view. click to place the leader. under Keynote Table. 13 Click Modify. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 14 Save the file. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. In the Type Selector. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. and click OK. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click to place the note. select all the keynotes. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. under Path Type. and click Open. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. select Absolute. 11 Click Modify. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Browse. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.A1. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 . as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 9 In the drawing area. navigate to 07463.txt.

and click OK. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. for Scale. 7 In the Rename View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. and click Rename. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 6 In the Project Browser. For Layer/Level Colors. right-click Drafting 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Center-to-center. The detail is imported as an import symbol. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.dwg. enter EPDM Metal Coping. select Black and white. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. select Reference other view. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 3 On the Options Bar.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.rvt. Click Open. and click OK. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. click Callout. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select 1 : 5. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).

Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.No Reference. click Rename. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. enter Detail . The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and click Properties. 12 Click OK twice. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 5 Click Modify. and click OK. 6 Select the callout. click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. and double-click the callout. delete the existing value. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 . for New. click Edit/New. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

The callout is updated with the sheet information. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. enter Header @ Sliding Door. and click OK.Elev.rvt. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . double-click A105 . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. for Name. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 18 Save the file. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 Proceed to the next exercise./Sect. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 3 On the View Control Bar. “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail.No Reference)./Det. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

and enter 20. . 5 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. click Duplicate. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 18 While pressing CTRL. Board. 14 Click OK 3 times. select the left and bottom edges of the region. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Gypsum-Plaster. click . Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. enter Gyp.5mm. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the width dimension. 19 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. for Name. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . click Filled Region.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. select Wide Lines. 17 Click Modify. 11 In the Name dialog.

Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor up. 24 Select the mirrored region.20 On the Design Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. and on the Edit toolbar. (Draw). click 22 On the Options Bar. 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing .

27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region.Finish. enter Wood . 37 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and select the right edge of the wood region. 30 In the Name dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Duplicate. verify that the thickness is 19mm. select Wood . Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Filled Region. click . Draw a rectangle as shown. click Edit/New. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.25 Click Modify. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Region Properties. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar.Finish. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click (Align). for Name. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

click Modify. and double-click A101 . select Viewport : No Titlemark. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. under Sheets. and click to place it. 17 On the Design Bar.Unit 18. 18 In the Project Browser. 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 19 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 . 15 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Sheets (all).■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Legends. click Typical Symbol Legend. 16 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. and press ENTER. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. enter 900 mm. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 6 On the View Control Bar. For View. 3 For Scale. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. click New ➤ Legend. For Host length. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 On the Options Bar. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Medium for Detail Level. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Legend Component. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. select Section. select Viewport : No Titlemark.20 In the Type Selector. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.rvt. 21 On the Design Bar. select1 : 50. for Name.

and on the Options Bar. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Text. 10 Select the second wall. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Family.9 On the Design Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. Creating a Component Legend | 599 . 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text without a leader. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.13 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 19 Enter the following text. click to add text with a single-segment leader. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. The text note with leader is added to the legend. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.

drag it onto the sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. and click New Sheet. click Modify to end the command. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the new sheet. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 In the project Browser. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. The open drawings are both visible. right-click Sheets (all). double-click Level 4.

Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). 33 In the floor plan view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. select the Wall Type 2 component. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.35 Select the patio divider wall. 36 On the View Control Bar. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. contractor inquiries. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. You can create a sequence of revisions. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 37 Optionally. select Medium for Detail Level. or changes in building material availability. In this exercise.

6 Verify that Issued is cleared. Using the table. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For example. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Visible. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. 3 In the Revisions dialog. In most instances. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. enter a date. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.rvt. 2 On the Settings menu. When Issued is selected. If Visible is not selected. double-click Level 4. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. if the active revision is number 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. yet as concise as possible. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. click Revisions. When you use this option. under Floor Plans. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 5 For Description. In general. If you select By Sheet.

You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. click (Move).8 Click OK.rvt. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 Select the partition. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. under Floor Plans. 3 Select the divider. double-click Level 4. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. including revision number and revision date. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.

Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 .6 On the Design Bar. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 In the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved.

The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Line Weight. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 6. 16 Click OK. you load a revision tag into the project. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab.

If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because you chose to number by project. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. on which you place a revised view. double-click A107 . under Sheets.4 On the Options Bar. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. click Tags. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Working with Revisions | 607 . scroll down to Revision Clouds. select Leader. you need to add one. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the cloud is tagged as number 1.rfa. In the Tags dialog. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. click Training Files. you prevent further changes to the revision. 10 In the drawing area. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 5 In the Tags dialog. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. you create a sheet view in your project.rvt. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.Unnamed. You do this by issuing the revision. 11 Click to place the tag. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. You then issue a revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 6 Click Load. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. and because the revision is the first in the project. 8 In the Tags dialog.

under Add. select None for each issued revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. for Visible. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. you can no longer modify it. You can continue to add revisions. select Issued. click Revisions. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. click Revisions. 6 In the Revisions dialog. 608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. click New. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and click OK. On the Settings menu. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.

Title Sheet. click Training Files. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing from Other Applications | 609 . under Sheets.9 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you learn to import information from other applications. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.rvt. and spreadsheets. text. double-click T . such as images. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. into a project.JPG. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. and place it on a sheet. Importing Image Files In this exercise.

you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Select the text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.doc text file in another window. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click T . click Text. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Sheets. for Leader. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. 610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click to add text without a leader. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Revit MEP window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.xls. under Sheets. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. This step has been completed for you. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 5 Click OK. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. for Name. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. select the document writer. with the new text box still selected. and click Save. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 4 Under Printer. click Modify. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This process may vary from system to system.Unit 18. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Desktop. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click A102 . This exercise demonstrates a common method. click Modify. enter Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.JPG.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. 1 In the Project Browser.JPG. for File name. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 9 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.mdi. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 .rvt. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

613 . as well as a large lab building. you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. called dependent views. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The large floor plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

| 615 .

4 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. select the crop region. click Training Files. 6 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Level 2. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. The dependent view opens. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Aviary. enter Level 2 . and click Rename. right-click Level 2. and click OK.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. for Name.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 . 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.

right-click Dependent on Level 2. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 15 Select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2. 14 Click in the drawing area. 618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .Labs. click (Hide Crop Region).9 On the View Control Bar. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 12 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . and click OK. 10 On the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. 11 In the Project Browser.

Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. click (Hide Crop Region). click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the Zoom flyout. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 . click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.

24 On the Design Bar. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

click Level 2 . select Double Dash. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Rename. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. for Name. and click OK. 27 Under Matchline. and drag it onto the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 28 For Line Pattern. expand Sheets. and click OK. 31 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. under Floor Plans. for Line Weight. enter Level 2 Aviary.Aviary. right-click A101 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

click Modify. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . double-click Level 2.Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. for Target view. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.35 On the Design Bar.Aviary is selected. 39 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and place the Level 2 . click View Reference.

42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. click Modify. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . click (Show Crop Region). 45 On the Zoom flyout. 41 On the Options Bar.Labs.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 46 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .Aviary. 44 On the Design Bar. for Target view. 47 On the View Control Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 .

leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 49 If. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . after modifying the annotation crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. right-click. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. click the far right control.

and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. under Floor Plans.51 On the View Control Bar. 57 On the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. and click Apply Dependent Views. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click Zoom To Fit. expand Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 . 54 In the Project Browser. but are not placed on sheets. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. select all views in the list.

4 In the Rename View dialog. 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Training Files. and double-click South Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). expand South Elevation. for Name. right-click South Elevation.Left. 5 In the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. enter South Elevation . select the Crop Region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser.

9 In the Project Browser.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 . enter South Elevation . for Name. under Sheets. right-click South Elevation. 11 Select the crop region. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. for Name. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename. cropping the view to the lab building. 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click A103 Unnamed. and drag it toward the center of the view. 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.Right. cropping the view to the aviary. click OK to accept the default titleblock. enter South Elevation. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar.

click South Elevation .Left. verify that Elevation: South Elevation .18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Options Bar.Right. 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. and drag it onto the sheet. click View Reference. click Modify. under Elevations. and drag it onto the sheet. under Elevations. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. for Target view. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. under Elevations. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. double-click South Elevation.Left is selected. click South Elevation .

31 In the Project Browser.28 On the Options Bar. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click A103 .South Elevation. for Target view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 .Right. select Elevation: South Elevation . under Sheets (all).

Select the crop region. and click Activate View. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.NOTE If the view references are not visible. 630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

More specifically. 633 . how to control fill pattern colors. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.Viewing 12 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.

2 In the Project Browser. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.rvt. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. on the Standard toolbar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sections. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. click . you learn how to access different views of the building model. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. expand Views (all). including elevation and three-dimensional views. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. expand Elevations. click Training Files. locate the Project Browser. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. and double-click East. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing . You create elevations.

Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. This change is applied only in this elevation view. The default name of the view is {3D}. 7 Click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. and click Hidden Line. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. This change is applied only to the active view. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. click Model Graphics Style. click . the east elevation. Exploring the Building Model | 635 . scroll down and clear Window Tags. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. 6 Under Visibility. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu.

under 3D Views. enter My 3D View. and click Rename. Move the mouse to pan the view. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and click OK. zoom. . 18 In the Project Browser. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. You can pan. right-click {3D}. 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. click X to close the view. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. . NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. click to reorient the view. and expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. 12 Press and hold CTRL. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. The view follows the movement of the cursor. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click My 3D View.9 On the View toolbar.

and double-click Level 1.rvt. After you specify the second point (the view target). expand Floor Plans. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. outside of the dimension lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and distance from the target. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637. click Camera. eye height. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. m_Viewing_Exercise. Cameras define the eye point. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. expand Views (all). Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. click Dynamically Modify View. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Press and hold the left mouse button. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. and sideways to see how the view changes. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. down. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Move the cursor up. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu.

Four views of the model display in the drawing area. click Tile. Press and hold the left mouse button. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. and target 12 On the Window menu. Change the camera position. 13 On the View menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. height. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view.

The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. right-click 3D View 1. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

and click Shading. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and move it to another location. click Model Graphics Style. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). click to create a new 3D view. 20 On the View Control Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation.17 In My 3D View. under Camera. right-click. and click Element Properties. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. Click OK. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 .

21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. A rotation tool is also displayed. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the View menu. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. click View Properties. A section box is displayed around the model. 24 Click the section box. under Extents. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and click OK. select Section Box. as shown in the following illustration.

click Section.rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. “Creating a Section View” on page 643. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and rotate the section box around the model. and maximize this view. double-click Level 1. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Creating a Section View | 643 .26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans.

View the section 5 To view the section. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. right-click. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. select the section view. or in the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. select Floor Plan: Level 1. click Modify. 8 Select the section line. 7 In the Go To View dialog. double-click the section head. and click Open View. and double-click Section 1. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. expand Sections.

move the cursor around the building model. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. Creating Elevation Views | 645 . 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Notice the change in section depth. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. double-click Level 1. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 12 Select the section line. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. m_Viewing_Exercise.9 On the Design Bar. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Notice the change in the view direction. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. click Elevation.

a. double-click Elevation 1 .a by default. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. click Modify. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. The elevation is named Elevation 1 .b. Elevation 1 . and click. Elevation 1 .4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. under Elevations.b. 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Do not select the arrow. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. double-click Level 1. zoom in. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 10 In the Project Browser. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.

12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and the insulation color to pink. click Training Files. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. in this case. and applies to phasing override materials as well.11 If you want to save your changes. in a compound wall. For example. such as the one below.rvt. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. a shade of gray. where each layer is assigned a different material. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the File menu. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. such as Brick on CMU. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. click Save As. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and open Common\c_Showroom. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. floors. roofs. and other families. This includes walls. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. In addition. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson.

expand Sections (Section Head .Level 3.Filled). click Materials. expand 3D Views. select Masonry . select Masonry . Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. and double-click 3D. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. click Materials.Brick for Name. expand Views (all). 3 In the Materials dialog. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. click Color. select red. The surface pattern of the brick is black. 9 In the Materials dialog. 5 In the Color dialog. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. 648 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 4 Under Cut Pattern.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice.Brick for Name. 2 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all).

click Color. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Color dialog. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics.rvt.10 Under Surface Pattern. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. select white. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. c_Showroom. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. click View Properties. expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK twice. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. The surface pattern of the brick is now white.

Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. right-click. click Detail Level. and click OK three times. click Modify. and click Element Properties. select Solid fill for Name. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. on the File menu. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. and click Fine.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. If you create more than one plan region in a file. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. . 14 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. click Edit/New. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 7 In the Color dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select a shade of gray. 12 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. By default. and click OK. double-click Level 2. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field.

click Training Files. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. refer to the online Help for more information. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. line type.coincident edges. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and you cannot control their visibility. line color. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. or pattern. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view.

3 In the Level 1 view. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and the view depth plane. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. click .View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Plan Region. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. the top and bottom clip planes. view range. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. Plan regions have a single property. In the following illustration. the south elevation is also displayed. which is similar to the view range for plan views. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. expand Floor Plans. On the Options Bar.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 . The plan region displays as a dashed green line. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 4 Select the plan region. top and bottom clip planes. 6 In the View Range dialog. click Finish Sketch. right-click. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. By selecting Parent View’s Level.■ ■ On the Design Bar. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. under Extents. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. 9 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. click Modify. Press ESC to end the command. the line turns red. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. click Edit for View Range. and click Element Properties. and then click OK twice. When you select the plan region. 8 Click Apply.

The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 10 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. on the File menu.

billboards. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views. and posters. to place and render decals to create signs. 655 . you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.

you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. the floor. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. When you complete these changes.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. you select a scene that defines the model environment. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In this exercise. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. After you create the perspective view. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. and create the perspective view that you want to render.

under Name. click Training Files. and click the tab in the context menu. under Construction. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . 8 In the Materials dialog.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Wall. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . click Edit for Structure. and click Edit/New. click . verify that Co-house . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Cavity Wall . select Masonry . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.Brick. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. 3 On the Options Bar. click Materials. 9 Under AccuRender.Brick.

click Materials. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 12 Click OK twice. enter Aluminum. click Modify. 11 Under Name. 19 Click OK four times. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit/New. 24 In the Material Library. select Polished.Plain. under _accurender. 14 On the Options Bar.200mm. under _accurender.Asphalt. click Edit for Structure.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 22 In the New Material dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. expand Masonry and click Brick. 25 Under Name. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Materials dialog. expand Metals. 23 Under AccuRender. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. select Carib. click Duplicate. 27 On the Design Bar. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building.Running. . click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. and click . 26 Click OK twice. Polished and click OK. select Site . Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. under Name. for Layer 2. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. under Name. under Construction. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. and click Aluminum. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 16 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor.

TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. 32 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. verify that New is selected. select Exterior under Type. and click OK. under Name. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. floor. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. select the curtain wall mullion again. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. click No. under Materials and Finishes. click Region Raytrace. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. click in the Material field. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. Polished. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 29 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. click . and then click . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select Aluminum. 33 Click OK three times.

Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 38 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 1st Flr.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. Cnst. 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. In a later exercise. expand Views (all). the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660. producing a photorealistic effect. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). floor.

right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click to place a tree. click Site Component. Create a new type of tree. select M_Tree . click Modify.9 Meters. select any of the deciduous trees. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 7 In the Type Selector. and click .2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. and click Site. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 . and click Site Component.

under Other. and click OK twice. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. Black. enter Black Oak. m_Cohouse. select Oak.rvt. and click OK. and place two black oak trees. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 15 Under Other. 12 In the Plant Library. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. under accurender. 13 Under Name. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 In the Name dialog. select Black Oak for Type Comments. as shown in the following illustration. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. click Edit/New. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. expand Trees and Shrubs. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click display the Plant Library. and click Deciduous. under Identity Data. click in the Value field for Plant Name. and click OK.

on the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. The new perspective view is displayed. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. view open. Creating a Perspective View | 663 . click Camera. Cnst.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr.

6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. view. 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst. expand 3D Views. and click Show Camera.

and click OK. m_Cohouse. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. double-click Exterior. place. and environment settings that you use to render the view. you select a scene and specify time. and click Rename. enter Exterior. 8 In the Rename View dialog. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665.7 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. lighting. date. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). click the Solar Angles tab. under Scene Settings. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. and click Sun. 8 Under Time. click Settings. 6 Select By Date. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. Time. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 7 Under Date.

Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. click .9 Click the Place tab. click Image Size. click Capture Rendering. 20 In the Name list.20 for Cloudiness. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. USA. and click OK. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. select Autumn for Plant Season. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. under Background Color. 10 Click in the Cities list. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 26 On the Design Bar. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. Dark. click Raytrace. The Ground Plane tab displays.00 (many clouds. 11 Scroll down. select Good for Quality. 17 Under Advanced. under Scene Settings. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. click Site. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 . and select Boston. 18 Click Material. Rye. click Environment. select Ground Plane. click No. and enter bo. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Scene Settings. under _accurender. MA. 19 In the Material Library. 21 Click OK twice. select Grass. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.) 14 Click OK. 13 Enter . and click OK. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 16 In the Environment dialog.

30 On the Design Bar. 32 If you want to save this exercise. m_Cohouse. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. on the File menu. define the view and render scene settings. expand Floor Plans. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click 2nd Flr. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668. and finally. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. click Save As. expand Renderings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Cnst. To create the rendered scene.rvt. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

click Component. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. select Rotate after placement. 7 Repeat steps 4 . and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 4 In the Type Selector.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. Adding RPC People | 669 .6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. 670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .8 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. m_Cohouse. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.

The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Cnst.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 .

right-click 3D View 1. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width. and click OK. under Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click Rename. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. enter 178 mm for Height. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click the dimensions for Size.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.

14 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips are displayed on the section box. click View Properties. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. A section box is displayed around the building model. and click OK. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click Modify.9 In the Rename View dialog. 11 On the View menu. and select the section box. select Section Box. 12 On the View menu. enter Interior. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. under Extents. and click OK. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 . Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar.

12 Scroll down. 10 Click the Place tab. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. By limiting the geometry. and environment settings used to render the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click OK. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and enter bo. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click the Solar Angles tab.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click Environment. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 4 Under Type. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. 8 Under Date. and click Save. select Interior. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. on the Main tab. date. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 7 Select By Date. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 14 Click Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Sun. and enter Interior Scene for Name. under Scene Settings. you reduce the rendering time. Time. 9 Under Time. under 3D Views. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Background Color. m_Cohouse. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 11 Click in the Cities list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. place. under Scene Settings. 17 In the Environment dialog. MA. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. you create a render scene to specify the time. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 13 Click the Settings tab. and click OK. click Settings. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. select New. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. USA. and select Boston.

you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. such as windows and doors. as daylight sources. 24 Under Scene Settings. 5 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse. under 3D Views.18 Under Advanced. click OK. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. under accurender. select Ground Plane.rvt. 21 In the Name list. select {3D}. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Dark. Curtain Wall 1). select Grass. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. double-click Interior. 22 Click OK twice. under Use View’s Section Box. 20 In the Material Library. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. Rye. click Radiate. double-click {3D}. 19 Click Material. select Summer for Plant Season. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. and click OK. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Site. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. click Daylights. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. The Ground Plane tab displays. You can select families with transparent materials.

begins.The radiosity process. When radiate completes. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 Close the exercise file. click Raytrace. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. on the File menu. which can take several minutes. 7 On the Design Bar. the following rendered view is displayed. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. and save the exercise file with a unique name. . The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 9 If you want to save your changes. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. 8 On the Options Bar. click Save As.

Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. If you prefer to use Metric values. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you must select or define a scene. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. click Training Files. In a plan view. elevation. and change unit formats as desired. and open Common\c_Townhouse. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and ends in the far corner of the living room. but you can also define it in a 3D. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise.rvt. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. proceeds through the dining room. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. or section view.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click the tab in the context menu. of the walkthrough. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the Options Bar. expand Walkthroughs.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Walkthrough 1. and click to specify the start point. and double-click 1st Floor. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 3 On the Options Bar. or the first key frame. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. click . right-click in the Design Bar.

verify Field of view is selected. If it is not. 13 On the Options Bar.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 12 On the View menu. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 9 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 . 14 Click . click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 11 Under Change. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. select the crop boundary. and select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x).

3 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.rvt. double-click 1st Floor. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and click OK. c_Townhouse. click . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. under Extents. The walkthrough plays. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. proceed to the next exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter 1 for Frame. press ESC. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. clear Far Clip Active. and click OK.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 17 Click . 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680. 16 On the Options Bar.

Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path for Controls.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration.

the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. hidden line. If you are unsure of what option to use. The AVI is recorded. click Edit Walkthrough. or with AccuRender raytracing. shaded. When you export the walkthrough. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. c_Townhouse. 3 Under Output Length. 1 On the File menu. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. shaded with edges. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click Walkthrough 1.7 Click the third key frame position. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click OK. without opening Revit MEP 2008. and click Save. 2 In the Save As dialog. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe.rvt. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select <Shading> for Display mode. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. and then click to play the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. under Walkthroughs. 4 Under Format.

click Save As. on the File menu. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. reducing the size of the image. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. specifying the number of frames. and save the exercise file with a unique name. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 8 If you want to save this exercise.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 685 . you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. In this tutorial.

1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all). A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 01 Entry. A 3D view is created.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. click Training Files. Creating a Solar Study .rvt. click Camera. as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View In this exercise.

11 Proceed to the next exercise.Courtyard View. and click Rename. and click OK. click Modify. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 . click to reorient the view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. as shown. if necessary. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.4 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry. click Save As. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. you create a section cutaway view. enter Solar Study . 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. 10 On the File menu. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 6 On the Design Bar. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687. as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view.

click 10 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. click Section. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Rename View dialog.3 On the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. double-click the section head. expand Sections. 688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click OK. to reorient the view. 6 To view the section. click .

changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. and click OK. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. to expand the dialog. double-click 01 Entry. as shown. and click OK. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 . clear Section Boxes. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. then select Medium. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. click Save. and under Orient to a View. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. do not display many elements in 3D.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 18 On the File menu. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. under 3D Views. 17 To hide the section box. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. In some cases. On the Annotation Categories tab. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 On the Design Bar. then Fine. under Floor Plans. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Rename View dialog. including the house. you create a plan cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Typical plan views. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. right-click {3D}. 14 In the Project Browser. click Callout.

and click Rename. click Modify. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. and click OK. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click . as shown. click 8 On the View toolbar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . to reorient the view. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. and under Orient to a View. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog.4 In the Project Browser.

click Save. and click Rename. right-click {3D}. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 . so you can see into the building from the top. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.15 Select the Roof.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 21 On the File menu. 17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .

or multi-day solar study. For the Multi-Day solar study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 5 Click the Single-Day tab.Courtyard View. you specify the location. expand Views (all). Los Angeles. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 10 Under Place. MA. you specify the location. select Los Angeles.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson.Boston. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. expand 3D Views. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. USA is selected. CA. Click the Single-Day tab. single-day. For this study. date range. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. leave the slider at 50. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 2 On the View Control Bar. date. USA. for City. . For the Single-Day solar study. and time range. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. You can create a still. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . enter Summer Solstice. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. click . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. Creating Solar Studies . and time. and double-click Solar Study . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays.

17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Frame. select June 22. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Under Frame. click . 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. for Date. and click OK. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. For Time Range. Los Angeles. select December 22. click OK. and click OK.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click OK. 19 On the File menu. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 16 In the Name dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 14 In this case. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . enter 10 and press ENTER.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click To display the next key frame. select Winter Solstice. . click . Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. on the Single-Day tab. 2006. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 2006. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ For Time Interval.Courtyard View is currently displayed. click . enter Winter Solstice. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Clear Ground Plane at Level. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Los Angeles is selected. Los Angeles. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. under Sun and Shadows Settings.

double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. approximately as shown. click . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. Click and enter Dining. Los Angeles. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click To play the animation from start to finish. 14 On the Options Bar. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. under Floor Plans. . Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click OK. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house.■ To display the next sequential frame. click Text. on the Single-Day tab.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . under Sun and Shadows Settings. The solar study animation plays. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 13 On the View Control Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click outside of the text box to end the command. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file.

6 On the View Control Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown. select Section Boxes. 11 To display the section box. expand 3D Views. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 5 In the Project Browser. click . 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. select Summer Solstice. and click OK.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. Los Angeles. On the Options Bar. click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click OK. click . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout.

for Model Graphics Style. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and enter 5 to 50. and click OK. To maintain the proportions of the frame. as shown. For Frames per second. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. For File name. verify that the value is set to 15.12 In the drawing area. select AVI Files. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. clear Section Boxes. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select Frame range. For Dimensions. On the Annotation Categories tab. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. if necessary. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 Click outside of the section box. Under Format.Los Angeles. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Under Output Length. select the section box. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 15 To hide the section box. For Save as type. enter 450 in the first field (width).

“Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. For File name. 8 In the Save As dialog. you open each image. and enter 5 to 10. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. click OK. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. For Save as type. verify that Hidden Line is selected. of the animation separately. Los Angeles. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 18 In the Save As dialog. 20 On the File menu.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. click Save. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. click Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. or frame. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. click . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. BMP. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . depending on the Frame Range.Los Angeles. For Dimensions. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. TIFF. or any single-frame format. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. on the Single-Day tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Output Length. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 . Under Format. For Frames per second. enter 450 in the first field (width). select Frame range. select PNG. click Save. In this example. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. and click OK. such as JPEG. and click OK. select Winter Solstice. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Compressor. for Model Graphics Style. or GIF. To view the animation. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. verify that the value is set to 15. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE When you export to PNG.

under 3D Views.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area.9 On the File menu. click Save. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

as shown. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . and on the View Control Bar.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 5 Select the roof.

clear Section Boxes. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 8 On the View Control Bar. for File name enter 2pm .Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click OK. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Week Interval. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. MA. click Save. click the Multi-Day tab. and click Duplicate. and click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. under Sun and Shadows Settings.Boston. USA. For Time. 18 On the File menu. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. On the Annotation Categories tab. specify 2:00 pm. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. In the Save As dialog. and click Save. and click OK. Click the Desktop icon. select One week. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ .Los Angeles . For Time Interval. 17 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. for Compressor. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.

5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. click Apply. Then. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. change the time back to 12:00 PM. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. 9 Under Date and Time. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . Orienting to True North | 701 . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Under Date and Time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. click . on the Still tab. In this exercise. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. select Summer Solstice. and select Winter Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Still tab. For example. and click OK. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

click the Still tab. under Graphics. and click OK. and select View Properties. in the Angle from Project to True North field. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. double-click 01 Entry. Notice that the project rotates in the view. In the Element Properties dialog. select True North. On the Options Bar. for Orientation. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. click . enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. under Floor Plans. 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area.

click OK. click the Single-Day tab. are saved with the project. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. In the Save As dialog. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Orienting to True North | 703 . 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Summer Solstice. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 21 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. click . 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Los Angeles. under 3D Views. for File name.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. including the angle from True North. For Save as type. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that AVI Files is selected. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Apply. and click OK.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click GO. select Project North. capturing it. for Resolution. enter 600 in the first field. 28 Once you are finished with the study. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. under Graphics. under Floor Plans. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. for Scene. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. double-click 01 Entry. Right-click in the drawing area. Rendered views do not have this limitation. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. for Dimensions. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Draft (75 dpi). The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. On the Options Bar.■ Under Format. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Raytrace. and click OK. click Save. Since a rendered image is temporary. under 3D Views. for Orientation. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. and click Save. On the Options Bar. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. and click OK. and select View Properties. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. under 3D Views. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the Desktop icon. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Compressor. 29 On the File menu. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 2 In the Project Browser. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room.

and click Save. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 7 Review some captured images of the building. click Capture Rendering. for Save as Type. The scene is rendered in high resolution. 5 On the Design Bar. for Resolution. In the Project Browser. click Save. select Presentation (300 dpi). click Export Image. Rendering an Interior View | 705 . In the Save As dialog. under Renderings.■ ■ On the Options Bar. select JPEG. click GO. On the Options Bar. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

type. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number. elevations.Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. Advanced Model Graphics. length. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. the Linework Tool. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. or the client. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . and Section Boxes. In this tutorial. an outside reviewer. you explore the stylistic approach." In Revit MEP. and details. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. a consultant. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. In this series of exercises. there are several options for expressing the architecture. sections. Whether the audience is the general contractor." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. To express texture beyond material specifics. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. For the realistic approach.

Co-house. 708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Using the pre-built building model.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of the plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst.rvt. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. expand Views (all). A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a presentation floor plan. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. click Training Files.

click the Annotation Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. Down Arrow. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Floor Plans. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. sections. 710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and so on in this view.2 In the Project Browser. click Save As. Cnst. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and click Rename. 10 On the File menu. elevations. Notice that no annotations display in this view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. this represents the view getting smaller. expand the Stairs category. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 Click OK. exit the menu. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and clear DOWN Text. click in the drawing area. click the Scale control and select 1:100. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and click OK. UP Text. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. This turns off the visibility of all tags. dimensions. 7 Under Visibility. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. Up Arrow. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. you can create. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select By Date. click for Place. MA. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ Under Intensity. click . Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Place tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. the darker the shadows. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. specify 35 for Shadow. At that place. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Under Shadows Properties. Within a Project. 6 Under Settings. USA for City. The higher the number.rvt. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 . and click Save. on the Still tab. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 5 Under Settings. navigate to the folder of your choice. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Time and Place. double-click it in the Project Browser. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.11 In the Save As directory. 8 Select Boston. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.

“Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. click . and select 1st Flr. under Settings. click OK. however. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 Proceed with the next exercise.NOTE For this step. be aware that if you enter a different city. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 17 On the File menu. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you can enter any city you wish. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. click Save. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. and click OK. clear Ground Plane at Level. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Cnst. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. 11 Click OK. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.

5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Arch Portrait. and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 4 In the Views dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click OK. and click to place it. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and notice a view title displays. right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. and click View. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 . click Sheet. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor.

Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. click Duplicate. click . 714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Edit/New. and click Activate View. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. enter Presentation. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. To accomplish this. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. select No for Show Title.

25 In the Name dialog. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click . click Edit/New. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. under Graphics. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Filled Region. click Duplicate. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. fill properties. 20 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. enter Solid Black. and click OK. When you are finished drawing the chain. and select Chain. for Fill Pattern. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. If necessary. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. select Invisible Lines. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 . and the boundary of the region. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. click .

click OK. 34 On the File menu. select Solid Fill. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click View Properties. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. click Finish Sketch. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. click Save. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Identity Data. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click Deactivate View. under Name. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 30 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. clear Visible. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click South. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 2 In the Project Browser. click in the drawing area. under Pattern Overrides. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Override. and click Rename. enter Presentation South Elevation. scroll up. exit the menu. click in the Walls row. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. right-click Copy of South. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. on the Model Categories tab. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. and clear Elevation Swing. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Views (all). Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . under Elevations. under Visibility.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Elevations. 9 Click OK. expand the Doors category.

Time and Place. under Settings. click . 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Under Shadow Properties.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. select By Date. click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. By changing the angle of the sun. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718. click Save. click Duplicate. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 35 for Shadow. select Cast Shadows. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 20 On the File menu. and click OK. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 Under Intensity. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.

Presentation. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. Notice the viewport displays a view title. expand Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. and click Add View to Sheet.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all). click Add View.rvt.

720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. Notice the view title no longer displays. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. select Viewport: Presentation.

you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Save. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.8 On the File menu. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.

under Floor Plans. 722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select 1: 100 for Scale. 3 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Section 2 is added to the building model. click Section. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 2.rvt. To fit correctly in the analytique. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 4 Add the section shown below. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). double-click 1st Flr. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Cnst. expand Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. click Callout. click Modify. click the Model Categories tab. clear Visible. and click OK. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). 15 Under Visibility. click Override. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. select 1 : 100 for Scale. enter Presentation Section 2. click in the Walls row. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 . and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. right-click Callout of Section 2.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click OK. 20 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. clear Annotation Crop. Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. 22 On the Options Bar. and clear Elevation Swing.17 Under Visibility. click . The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. scroll up. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . expand the Doors category. under Extents. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. When you select the crop boundary. clear Crop Region Visible.

Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.rvt. Under Shadows Properties. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 . specify 35 for Shadow.24 On the File menu. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. In addition. and click Advanced Model Graphics. open the Project Browser and. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Under Intensity. 2 On the View Control Bar. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Click Apply. double-click Presentation Section 2. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.

Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. was added to this dataset for training purposes. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click OK. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. select Directly. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Override Silhouettes.In the steps that follow. 11 On the File menu. click Save. click . and click OK. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. NOTE The line style. under Silhouette Edges. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. under Settings. select Relative to View. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

Presentation. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click to place the selected view. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. 5 In the Type Selector. select Section: Presentation Section 2.rvt. double-click A105 . 3 In the Views dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The view title no longer displays.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees.

8 Select the callout that you added previously. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. under Sections (Callout 1). click . and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. In the steps that follow. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and press ENTER. Using a clock as a reference. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. you click to specify the start radius. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. To rotate an object.

Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. the callout rotates 180 degrees. double-click A105 . Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all). and drag it up and to the left as shown. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 .Presentation.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter.

16 On the File menu. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter Presentation. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 2 On the View menu. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. After applying the view template to a new section view.15 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. 730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Create View Template from View. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog.rvt.

select Presentation. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). 15 Right-click the viewport. annotations.Presentation. and elevation swings no longer display. 12 In the Views dialog. under Sections (Type 1). click View Properties. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. right-click Section 1.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. and click OK. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Apply View Template. 16 On the View menu. lighting fixtures. Now. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. and click Activate View. 14 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . select Section: Presentation Section 1. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. click Add View. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. Notice the furniture. 7 In the Rename View dialog. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sheets (all).

18 Right-click the viewport. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Deactivate View. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click OK. traditional analytiques contain a detail. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732. such as a tracery window or column capital.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. In this exercise. 20 On the File menu. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. under Graphics. click Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.

and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. click Callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). select the callout. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter Presentation Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. 5 In the Rename View dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Modify. After you add the callout. and click Rename. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1).

7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . under Extents. 8 Right-click. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click Deactivate View. and move it into the position shown below. click Add View. select Viewport: Presentation. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View menu. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. and click OK.Presentation. select Custom for View Scale. click View Properties. click Modify. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 .

In the steps that follow. 23 On the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. and click OK. activate the viewport. 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. select Solid Black for Type. click Filled Region. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and make adjustments as necessary.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. under Sections (Callout 1). Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. When finished. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click Region Properties.

26 On the Project Browser. click .Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 . and sketch the rectangle shown below. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Activate View. click Filled Region. 29 On the Options Bar.

select Crop Region Visible. and click OK. under Extents.30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 33 Select the crop region. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 31 On the View menu. click Finish Sketch. click View Properties.

You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 .34 On the View menu. 37 On the File menu. click Save. and apply shadows to the views. click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click OK. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. under Extents. and click Deactivate View. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.

Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 2 On the View menu. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click 1 : 200. and click Advanced Model Graphics. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Orient ➤ Southwest. specify 35 for Shadow. 7 In the Name dialog. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Under Shadows Properties. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. click the Scale control. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Under Intensity. click Duplicate. double-click Isometric.

under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. and click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. and click Rename. in the list. under 3D Views. Cnst. Select Relative to View. and click OK. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. Notice the section box that displays around the building model.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. right-click Isometric 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. and click Rename. under Silhouette Edges. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. Select Ground Plane at Level. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 . under Extents. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Settings. 9 Click OK. select Override Silhouettes. right-click Isometric. select Section Box. Select 1st Flr. enter Isometric 1. 18 On the View menu. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Rename View dialog. enter Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 2.

These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views.20 Select the section box. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 23 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. You can use this to rotate the section box. make a duplicate of the view. right-click Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 22 In the Project Browser. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. under 3D Views. Before turning off the visibility of the section box.

and click OK. double-click Isometric 3. Notice the section box no longer displays. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.24 In the Rename View dialog. in the Type Selector. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Next. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 26 To hide the section box. enter Isometric 3. and click OK. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport: Presentation. 29 Select the section box. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. either adjust the plane location. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 .Presentation. 31 To hide the section box. 25 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. In such a case. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify on the Design Bar. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 34 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. clear Section Boxes. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. the stairs and railings may display. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK.

drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under 3D Views. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . in the Type Selector. in the Type Selector.35 In the Project Browser. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. 36 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation.

39 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. select Concrete for Type. click Lines. and click Deactivate View. 44 Using the drawing tools. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 45 On the Design Bar. select Transparent for Background. and on the Options Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 38 Select the poche filled region. and click OK. select Solid Black for Type. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. and then click Edit/New. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 . You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. This will make it easier to draw lines. under Graphics. click Edit. 43 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 42 Click OK twice.

Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you add it to the presentation sheet. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Cnst. you create the final view for the analytique. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr.49 On the File menu. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. click Camera. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. a cutaway perspective view. under Floor Plans. click Save. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Cast Shadows. specify 35 for Shadow. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Shadows Properties. and click Advanced Model Graphics.The view opens immediately. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click . Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Intensity. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.

8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Extents. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. click View Properties. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. Notice the controls that display on each plane. select Override Silhouettes. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. you must specify the actual size of the image. under 3D Views. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Sheets (all). Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . and click OK. and click OK. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. 18 To hide the crop region. Clear Crop Region Visible. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 19 To hide the section box. enter 165 mm for Width.14 Select the crop boundary. double-click A105 . 21 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. 15 On the Options Bar. click View menu ➤ View Properties. After placing it. click Size.Presentation. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. under Change. select Scale (locked proportions).

9 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 2 On the Options Bar. under Text. click Edit/New. click . click OK. and click OK. select the same font as the title. click Edit/New. 5 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. under Text. and click OK. click Save. select Text : Title. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. specify a text size of 40 mm. enter Description. click Text. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750.rvt. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select a font.22 On the File menu.

click Modify. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Save. 18 On the File menu. 17 On the Design Bar. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . select Text : Description. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 15 In the Type Selector.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. material set.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. they are still related and come from a single source. shape. 755 . Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. thus the term family. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. each with a different size. In this tutorial.

generic. In this lesson. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates.rfa extension. There are. foundation. This makes file management much easier.rfa extension. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. Using the Family Editor. For example. and roofs. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . however. and partition wall styles. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. floors. Host-based families have components that require hosts. The basic walls system family. exterior. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. while many more are stored in component libraries. for example. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. transfer them from one project to another. floors. You can load them into projects. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and when and how to use it. Walls. has wall types that define interior. and furniture. and roofs are examples of these types of families. exceptions to this rule. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . You also learn about the Family Editor. because there is only one file to track. In addition. such as a dome roof. trees. but you cannot create new system families. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. Standalone families include columns. Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates.

you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. for example. You create in-place families only within the current project. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. In this section. elevation. and when to use it. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. 2 On the File menu. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. if you change the original family. In the final exercise. such as plan. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Load Family command on the File menu. it is saved with the project. However. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 . or 3D. custom wall treatments. you can drag it into the document window. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. or you can load it using the Load From Library. and also a standalone furniture family component. how to access it. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. you learn about the Family Editor. After the family has been loaded in the project. To add a family to your project. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project.

9 Save the newly-defined family. and then load it into the project. if you have exhausted your external resources. you can click File ➤ Open. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 5 Finally. open it in the Family Editor. you can double-click any file with an . If you find a close match.In this exercise. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. modify it as needed. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. With Revit MEP open. In this case. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. presume it is a bay window that you require. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. When the family opens.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. it should be available within the Type Selector. you learn when to use the Family Editor. consider checking the web library and other web resources. such as newsgroups. To start a new family. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. Within the Windows® environment. how to access it. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. it opens within the Family Editor. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. select the appropriate template. navigate to a family file. and click Open. 3 Next. and click Open. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so.

you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. Using the installed templates. you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. You create a furniture family. you learn how to create a different type of component. not within the Family Editor. a lighting fixture. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In each lesson. and several annotation families. When you create an in-place family. 759 . In addition.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. you create it within the project file.

you draw the plan view components for the new door family. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. The door type has a variable height and width. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. and thickness. height. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

10 On the Options Bar. part of the door properties. Notice the four tiled views. click New ➤ Family. 5 On the Window menu. 6 Maximize the window. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. are also displayed. Floor Plan: Ref. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . click Symbolic Lines.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Labelled dimensions. click Tile. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. select Doors [projection]. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the View menu. click . 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. and represent the door opening profile. 7 Enter ZF. click Training Files. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 9 In the Type Selector. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Level.rft. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . select Thickness for Label. click Modify. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. select Width for Label. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 19 On the Options Bar.

Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. then you specify each end point. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Options Bar. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 24 Enter SI. click the down arrow button. you first specify the arc center. select Plan Swing [cut]. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. and select the command from the menu. as shown. 22 In the Type selector. click . so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 21 On the Design Bar. In the image below. click Symbolic Lines. along with the witness line controls.

click Set Work Plane. click Lines. and click . 3 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click OK. under Elevations. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. enter 50 mm for Depth.

click Dimension. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. 766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . then click to specify the dimension witness line. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Finish Sketch.8 On the Design Bar. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 10 On the Design Bar. double-click Left.

19 Under Detail Levels. click Modify. select Front/Back. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Medium. and clear Plan/RCP.12 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. under View Specific Display. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . and Fine are selected. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Left/Right. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify and select the dimension. select Thickness for Label. under Floor Plans. verify that Coarse. click Visibility. Level.

and click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. select Oak Door.Red/Stained. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. for Material. click Materials. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 7 In the Materials dialog box. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.No Gloss. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click . under Materials and Finishes.20 On the Options Bar. enter Oak Door for Name. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Panel for Subcategory. 15 On the Options Bar. click for Texture. click OK. under AccuRender. 6 Click OK. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. click Duplicate. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. select Oak Door for Name. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Dark. It also defines its appearance when rendered. you assign a material to the door leaf. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Name. 3 In the New Material dialog box. for Material. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click OK. click Modify. click . and click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click 17 In the Materials dialog box.

Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click View 1. under 3D Views. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 . click the Model Graphics Style control. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. and select Shading with Edges. 21 On the View Control Bar.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material.

28 Proceed to the next exercise. click Family Types. and click OK. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. click Family Types. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. 3 In the Name dialog box. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. enter 2000 mm for Height. Under Other. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. In the Family Types dialog box. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. enter 2500 mm for Height. Enter 1000 mm for Width. under Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. click New. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Click Apply. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. By flexing the new component. 27 Click OK. 770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 On the Design Bar.

15 In the New Project dialog box. Click Apply.rte.rfa. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. select it.4 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1220 mm for Width. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. 19 On the Options Bar. click Browse. 20 In the Open dialog box. Training Door. 17 Under Create new. click Wall. click New. Click Apply. 6 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 8 Under Family Types. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click New. click Load. Click Apply. enter 2100 mm for Height. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Enter 750 mm for Width. enter 2134 mm for Height. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Training Files. select Project. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Project. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Enter 925 mm for Width. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 11 Click OK. Define the second new door type. and click Open. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. enter 2000 mm for Height. Define the third new door type. 5 Under Family Types. under Template file. Training Door. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. Defining New Door Types | 771 . click Door. and click OK. 12 On the File menu. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click Save. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog box.rfa. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu.

25 On the Design Bar. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. click Door. click the Model Graphics Style control. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. click . 24 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges. 26 In the Type Selector.23 On the View toolbar.

you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. This completes the lesson. Finally. and specify values for the window width. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. 32 You can close all files without saving. Creating a Door Family. You create the window frame. Creating a Window Family | 773 . Creating a Window Family In this lesson. glazing and mullions as extrusions. default sill height. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. height. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. and mullion offset. and create the window sash as a sweep.30 In the Type Selector.

When you add labels to dimensions. Height and Default Sill Height. Four views are tiled on your display. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. 5 On the View menu. you specify the parameters for the new window family. is one of the type parameters. 2 On the File menu. The label name. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.rft. part of the window properties. click New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. Labelled dimensions. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. The window type has a variable height and width. click Tile. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Training Files. 4 On the Window menu. also one of the window properties. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. 7 Enter ZF. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. are also displayed. equally spaced vertical mullions. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels.

Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. This is the starting point for the new window. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. then sketching the sweep profile. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. This process is called “flexing the model. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 . 12 Click OK. Click Apply. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Enter 1800 mm for Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Change the height and width values again. enter 1300 mm for Height. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. and click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep.

Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. and click Open View. Snap the cursor to each corner. click the Scale control. click Finish Path. 9 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. and select 1:10. click Sketch Profile. 6 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click . 776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

select Prefer: Wall faces. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . 12 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click . click Ref Plane. and select the dimension. click Modify. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. and specify an offset of 50 mm.

the exact dimensions are not critical. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. However. and click OK. click . select Chain and click . 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 20 On the Options Bar. and select the reference plane. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. click Lines. NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 24 Below the red dot. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Sash for the Name. 23 On the Options Bar.

When the lock displays. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. When the lock displays. 28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 .26 Select the right edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.

as shown. select the line you want to move. click Modify. Modify each dimension if necessary. TIP After adding the dimension.29 On the Design Bar. and specify the dimension value. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. and double-click View 1. click Finish Profile. this is the top of the window opening. 35 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 . TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. under Views (all). Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. 37 In the Project Browser. When the lock displays. click Finish Sweep. click the lock to constrain the present value. When the lock displays. click . 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. expand 3D Views.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. 33 On the Tools toolbar. Next. zoom out until it displays. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click the lock to constrain the present value. 36 On the Design Bar. If necessary.

and select Lock. and select the option. 2 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter .45 mm for Depth. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Chain of walls or lines. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. double-click Exterior. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. press TAB to cycle through the selection options.38 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. click . under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK.

Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . and lock icons display on each line. ■ ■ Enter . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. 9 On the Design Bar. ■ Click .50 mm for Offset. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. set the following options: Click . click Finish Sketch.

Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. 784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The window sash extrusion is now complete. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. double-click View 1. double-click Right. 11 In the Project Browser. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. under 3D Views. under Elevations.10 In the Project Browser.

as shown. and enter 30 mm for Offset. click . under Elevations. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. double-click Right. click Ref Plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 .

and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter -12 mm for Depth. and click OK. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. and click to create the glass boundary. click . 13 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. under Identity Data.5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click Dimension. double-click Exterior. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. and select Lock. 8 Select the reference plane. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 11 In the Project Browser. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name.

double-click Right. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch.18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. click . NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. under Identity Data. sash. click Modify. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. After the family is loaded into a project. View the window model with frame. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 .

For example. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1500 mm for Width. under 3D Views. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm for Height. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. double-click View 1. NOTE After flexing the model. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model.24 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser.27 In the Family Types dialog box. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 1000 mm for Height. double-click Exterior. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click Apply. under Elevations. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. the exact location is not critical. click Ref Plane. Click OK. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . Enter 2000 mm for Width.

Do not be concerned with dimension values. After adding the dimension. click Dimension. 790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.4 On the Design Bar. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. as shown.

specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type.> for Label. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 . 9 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Under Group parameter under. select Family parameter.. Select Instance. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Dimensions. select <Add parameter.. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. Click OK. click Family Types. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes.

Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Set Work Plane. 20 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 14 Click the dimension value. As you did before. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click Dimension. click Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 22 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 .21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar. and click . enter 14 mm for Depth. Move the dimension values as shown. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. After you complete the sketch. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. and click OK. However. under Specify a new Work Plane. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.

select <Add parameter> for Label. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. enter Mullion Width for Name. Under Group parameter under. select Dimensions. select Family parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. 30 On the Options Bar.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 29 On the Design Bar. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. click Modify. Click OK.

■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. 33 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Remember. Select the dimension. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. This is changed in later steps. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Click Apply.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Under Other. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1500 mm for Width. and click Apply. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 1500 mm for Height.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 41 On the Design Bar. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. and aligned with the sash edge. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. or undoing the same. Under Other. 42 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. Enter 2000 mm for Width.NOTE After flexing the model. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. Click OK. In this case. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. enter 1000 mm for Height. 37 In the Family Types dialog box. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. evenly spaced. 39 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. click Set Work Plane. and click OK.

798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Mullion Width for Label. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. Move the dimension value as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Do not be concerned with the dimension value.44 On the Design Bar. 48 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Remember. click Dimension. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. as shown.

and select the vertical mullions. click Join Geometry. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Select the dimension. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu.NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. If necessary. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 56 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height.54 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. double-click View 1. Under Other. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. you can still see the window. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types.

59 Proceed to the next exercise. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 . and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. enter 1000 mm for Height. Enter 2000 mm for Width. sash. Click Apply. Under Other. Click OK. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. you assign materials to the frame. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.58 In the Family Types dialog box.

navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. click for Material. 8 On the View Control Bar. click for Texture. Dark. 9 Select the window frame sweep. click . 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. sash. under AccuRender. No Gloss. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Materials. 13 In the Materials dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. verify that Coarse. the sash. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Duplicate. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 18 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. Yellow/. Medium. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. 16 Under Detail Levels. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Shading with Edges. and the mullions. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and click OK. under Elevations. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. enter Pine Frame for Name. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. select Pine Frame for Name. select Edit for Visibility. under View Specific Display. click the Model Graphics Style control. clear the other view options.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. and Fine are selected. under Graphics. select Stained. under Identity Data. click Modify.

24 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. under 3D Views. 23 Under Detail Levels. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and Fine are selected. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 . double-click View 1. and click OK. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click Visibility. 21 On the Options Bar. Medium.Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations.

sash. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. and glass display their assigned materials. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . mullions.The window frame. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created.

but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. Defining New Window Types | 805 . Enter 1250 mm for Height. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. click New. The window height is doubled. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. and click Apply. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. In the Family Types dialog box. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. click Family Types. under Family Types. 7 In the Name dialog box. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. and click Apply.Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. Click Apply.

specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types.rfa. Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Open. 13 In the Name dialog box. click Save. click Window. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 20 In the Open dialog box. click New. 10 In the Name dialog box. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 In the Family Types dialog box. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Load. click New.rfa file. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Click OK. and click OK. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. select it. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click Apply.9 Under Family Types. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 15 On the File menu. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. Click Apply. Training Window.

select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 32 On the View menu. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. Defining New Window Types | 807 . 35 On the View Control Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Wall. 24 On the Options Bar. 34 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Type Selector. Notice the detail that displays. 27 In the Type Selector. click Thin Lines. 29 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. click . 23 On the Design Bar.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click Window. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. clear Tag on Placement.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . drawer base. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. rolltop. Finally. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. You begin by creating the desktop. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and drawers as extrusions. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family.

click Ref Plane. Floor Plan: Ref. Level. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 . one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown.rft. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 4 Maximize the view. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. 2 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Training Files. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. 5 On the View menu.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. their exact location is not critical. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.

Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. as shown. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. and ending at the right reference plane. 810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. click Dimension. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added.

12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. as shown. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 . 13 Select the left reference plane. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. and ending at the lower reference plane. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. click Modify. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal.

horizontal reference plane. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. as shown. click Modify. 19 Select the upper.17 To the right of the dimension you just created.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. For Group parameter under. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . 24 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter.21 On the Design Bar. Click OK.. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. TIP To do this. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. click Modify. Under Parameter Data. enter Length for Name. Select Type. select Dimensions. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. Afterwards.> for Label. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension.. select <Add parameter.

26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. enter Depth for Name. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. select <Add parameter..> for Label. you can still see the model. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 30 On the Design Bar.. click Family Types. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore. select Dimensions. 27 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. 814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.

Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. click Symbolic Lines. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Click Apply. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. click . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 .31 In the Family Types dialog box. it will also adapt to the same changes. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. enter 3000 mm for Length. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 2 On the Options Bar. Your lines may have a lighter weight. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. NOTE In the image below. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

select Level: Ref. click Lines. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. 816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the top edge. click . and enter 100 mm for Depth. 11 In the Project Browser. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. click Modify. click Set Work Plane. 8 On the Options Bar. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. Level for Name. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 10 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. double-click Front. and click OK.4 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. 5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines.

select <Add parameter. as shown. select Family parameter. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar.. and select the bottom edge. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. enter Height for Name.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. Under Parameter Data. 22 On the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 .> for Label. click Modify. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. click Dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.

Enter 750 mm for Height. select Family parameter. Enter 1200 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Under Parameter Data.. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click Apply. Select Type. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click Apply. click Modify. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 2000 mm for Length. select Dimensions. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.. 27 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. Click OK. enter Thickness for Name. Select Type. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. click Family Types. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter. 25 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. and click Apply. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. you can still see the model. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818.

4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Level. click Ref Plane. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. click . under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Lock the dimension as shown. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Level: Ref. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. and click OK. as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Click the lock icon as shown. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 13 On the Options Bar. Level for Name. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. click . 10 On the Design Bar.

16 On the Design Bar. two lock icons display. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. click Dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 .After you complete the rectangle.

select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 20 On the Tools toolbar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down.Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . as shown below at the cursor. 23 For the align-to reference. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 19 Select the four sketched lines. . click the Mirror tool. using the TAB key.

click Dimension. A lock icon displays. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 .24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions. select Family parameter. as shown. 28 Add two final dimensions. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. enter Drawer Base Width for Name.> for Label..■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Select Type. select <Add parameter.

Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 .32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. under Elevations. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch.

click Modify. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. However. 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 42 On the View menu. click the Scale control and select 1:20. notice that annotations display in this view. After the alignment. 45 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 41 On the View toolbar.37 On the Tools toolbar. a lock icon displays. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 40 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click it to lock the alignment. click . 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

and click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. and click Apply. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Height.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 47 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. click Family Types. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 . you can still see the model. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters.

then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. as shown. 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Right. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. under Elevations. 6 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. click . click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. and click to specify the upper left corner. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

then select the right parallel sketch line. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. click .8 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Select the desk top. then the lower horizontal sketch line. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 .

14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. the upper sketch line.11 On the Design Bar. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click Dimension. click Lines. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and lock it. . 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Finish Sketch. and lock it. click the Fillet arc tool.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 . 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. double-click Front. click . Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the right edge of the rolltop. select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. under Elevations. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete.

21 On the View toolbar. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. and click Apply. click . and click Apply. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. you can still see the model. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. click Family Types. 832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Design Bar. You can also use dimension constraints. Enter 200 mm for Thickness.

enter 2000 mm for Length. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click OK. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 . under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.25 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise.

click . Lock each dimension as you add it. 12 On the Options Bar. . under Elevations. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 6 On the Design Bar. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. There should be four dimensions as shown. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. double-click Front. click . After selecting the line of an upper drawer. zoom the view until you do. 14 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Tools toolbar. click Dimension. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.5 In the Project Browser. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. select Multiple Alignment. click drawer set on the left. 9 On the Design Bar. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 7 On the Options Bar. click Lines. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click OK. 20 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Materials dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. enter Desk . 22 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Modify. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. and select Shading with Edges. 25 In the New Material dialog box. Polished. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 28 Click OK. click . and click OK. click Finish Sketch. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 31 On the View Control Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. Dark. click . under Materials and Finishes. click 24 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. Cherry. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Texture. under AccuRender. 26 In the Materials dialog box.Wood. for Material. click Extrusion Properties. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 16 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. 17 On the Design Bar. click OK.

Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 33 On the Design Bar. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. and click Apply. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. and click Apply. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You can also use dimension constraints. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. The desk should adapt to all the changes. enter 2000 mm for Length. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. you can still see the model. Click OK. click Family Types. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 4000 mm for Length. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . If not.

11 On the File menu. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. click New. select it. click New. 18 In the Open dialog box. Training Furniture. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. click Family Types. and click Open. click Component. click Save. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click Apply. click . click Load. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. and click Apply. 9 In the Name dialog box. 6 In the Name dialog box. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 19 In the Type Selector. to start a new project based on your default template. 17 On the Options Bar.rfa. and click OK. click 14 On the View toolbar. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. click New. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.rfa file. 5 Under Family Types. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 15 On the View Control Bar. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 . 8 Under Family Types. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. and add the second desk. 23 In the Type Selector. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. and click to add the third desk. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.21 In the Type Selector. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson.

Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. click Set Work Plane. click New ➤ Family. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Level. 7 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. select Ref. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Baluster | 839 . However. 5 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and click OK. 9 On the Design Bar. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. click Lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. and double-click Ref. click Finish Sketch. expand Floor Plans. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes.rft. and click Open. Select Metric Baluster. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the View menu. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog box. their exact location is not critical.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 4 On the Design Bar.rte file. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. By default. click New ➤ Project. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. and click Open. select Training Files. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the extrusion. 2 In the New Project dialog box. The new custom baluster is now complete. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. Select the DefaultMetric. click the Modelling tab. click .rfa.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 12 On the Options Bar. In the New Project Dialog box. click Browse. click Stairs. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. double-click Front. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 14 Click the lock icon. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click OK.

click Edit/New. 11 On the View menu. select it. click . 13 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Shading with Edges.rfa file. 10 On the View menu. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 8 In the Open dialog box. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click Edit for Baluster Placement. and click Open. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 . click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the View toolbar. click . under Baluster Family. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box.7 On the File menu. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 19 Click OK. click Modify and select the existing railing.

you draw a sweep profile. In the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a rail profile. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . you create five different profiles: a sweep. soffits. and click Open. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. cornices. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. However. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. and a host sweep. a railing. their exact location is not critical. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise.rft. a reveal. The new sweep profile is now complete. and other sweep-defined objects. Select Metric Profile.rfa. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.Sweep. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. balusters. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click New ➤ Family. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. select Training Files. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. In this lesson. a stair nosing.

under Floor Plans. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. you create a stair nosing profile. select Training Files. and click Open. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. verify that Ref. click New ➤ Family. Select Metric Profile-Rail. Dataset ■ On the File menu. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click Lines. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. However.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 . their exact location is not critical. click New ➤ Family.rfa.rft. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. In the left pane of the New dialog box. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. The new rail profile is now complete. Level is open.Rail. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The new stair nosing profile is now complete. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. verify that Ref. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant.rft. click Lines. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. Level is open.rfa. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. and click Open. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. select Training Files. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane.rft. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. select Training Files. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. In the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a reveal profile. under Floor Plans. their exact location is not critical. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Stair Nosing. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. In addition. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. However.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. and click Open. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

Select Metric Profile-Hosted. select Training Files.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. However. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click New ➤ Family. their exact location is not critical. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Level is open. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 . and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. and click Open. you create a host sweep profile. In the left pane of the New dialog box. under Floor Plans. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane).rft. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. which may be any vertical surface.Reveal. verify that Ref. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. click Lines. The new reveal profile is now complete.

rfa.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. click New ➤ Project.rte file. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and click Open. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. their exact location is not critical. click Lines. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the New Project Dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. click OK. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. The new host sweep profile is now complete. 2 In the New Project dialog box.Host Sweep. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). select Training Files. click Browse. However. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu. click Create. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. Create a new project 1 On the File menu.

Sweep. the exact location of the path is not critical. expand Elevations. beside Load Profiles. select it. 9 On the Design Bar. Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser. and click Open. 5 In the Name dialog box. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load Profiles. and double-click South. and click OK. expand Views (all). navigate to the location of Profile . 8 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. click Finish Path. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click . 15 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click Finish Sweep. select Generic Models for Family Category. select Profile . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 11 In the Open dialog box. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 . click Finish Family. enter Sweep for Name.Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar.rfa. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path.

enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click Finish Family. on the Options Bar. click Browse. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. 20 Select the sweep profile and. 25 On the View toolbar. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. click Wall.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. select Training Files. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Under Constraints. click OK. 23 Click OK. click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. The sweep profile application is now complete. click Ref Plane.rte file. In the New Project Dialog box. click . Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 24 On the Design Bar. select Profile Is Flipped. 21 Select the sweep profile again and. click Edit. Select the DefaultMetric. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. on the Options Bar. click New ➤ Project. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Under Other.

4 Draw four walls as shown. their exact location is not critical. verify that Horizontal is selected. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 . 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View toolbar. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar.NOTE When you draw the walls. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click .

and click Open. click OK.Host Sweep : Profile . you specify the room tag parameters. and click OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box.Host Sweep for Profile. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Select M_Room Tag. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. and click Open.rft.rfa. select Profile . click Spin [Shift]. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. select it. floor and ceiling finish. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. .10 On the Design Bar. select Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. on the Options Bar. and area with labels added to extract project data. click Edit/New. under Construction. and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. navigate to the location of Profile .Host Sweep. 13 Select the wall sweep and. 17 On the View toolbar. you create a room tag which displays room name. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. 12 In the Open dialog box. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu. 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box. click Modify.

20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 13 On the Options Bar. click Label. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . enter 2 for the Text Size parameter.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Name. enter 2mm for Name. click OK. click . Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. select Label : 2mm. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 17 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Floor Finish. and click OK. click Duplicate. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog box. clear Underline. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 3 On the Options Bar. 16 Zoom in on the label. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Underline. click Edit/New. and click OK. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. click Label. select Area. select Ceiling Finish.

The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click . and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.rfa. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Select Generic Annotation. The new room tag is now ready for use.rft. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click Lines. and click Open. 3 On the Options Bar. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. select Training Files. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. notice that there is only one view available.

9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 . click .

16 In the Type Selector. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. select 3 for Line Weight. and click OK. click Object Styles. and select the upper vertical line. click New. in the North Line row. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. and click OK. under Modify Subcategories. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Modify. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Modify. Training North Arrow. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. enter North Line for Name. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .10 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Modify. select North Line. 17 On the Design Bar.

This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. select Training North Arrow. The titleblock has linework. In the New Project Dialog box. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. text. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. and labels. 5 Click OK.rfa.rte file. 12 On the Design Bar. graphics. click Modify. and click Open. select it. 8 In the Open dialog box. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Dataset ■ On the File menu. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. Select the DefaultMetric. and click Open. 10 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 7 On the File menu. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and your project data. select A1 metric. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click New ➤ Titleblock. select Training Files. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click New ➤ Project. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click OK. click Sheet.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Browse. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. click Symbol. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.

Select A0 metric. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click . 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 7 On the Options Bar. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. click Lines. click . and click .■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. and enter 140 for Offset. and click Open. and enter -25 for Offset. . and click to draw a new vertical line. 3 On the Options Bar.rft. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.

and enter 20 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Lines. 13 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. press CTRL. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click . 17 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. enter 30 for Offset. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 21 On the Options Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 .

25 On the Design Bar. navigate to Training Files/Common. 4 Zoom in on the logo. text notes. and click Open. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you add a company logo. and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Modify. select Company Logo. 2 In the Open dialog box. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. The titleblock linework is now complete. click Import/Link ➤ Image.jpg.

click Edit/New. click . click Text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. click Duplicate. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. in the text box. and click OK. under Text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. enter 10 for Text Size. select Text : 8mm. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select Bold. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and add an address and phone number as shown. 11 Click OK twice.

860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 Select the drag handle. click Modify. and select the consultant text note. and select the last text note.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Modify. address. Add consultant name. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. click Text. and drag the text note down as shown. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 17 On the Design Bar. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar.

click . 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 .23 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. select Constrain and Multiple. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.

34 Click OK twice. and enter Checked By:. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. enter 5 for Text Size. click Text. click Duplicate. click . 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. select Text : 5mm. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter Date:. under Text. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 5mm for Name. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 29 On the Options Bar. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Sheet Number:. 32 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New.

select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 . 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Issue Date. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location.

click Duplicate. click . enter 15 for Text Size. click Label. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. 55 Click OK twice. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Project Number. and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. select Drawn By. click Edit/New. and click OK. 50 On the Options Bar. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 53 In the Name dialog box. under Text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. enter 15mm Label for Name. select Label : 15mm Label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Sheet Number. and click OK. click Center and Middle. and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. select Client Name. select Project Name.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Label. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

click OK. and click Open. and click OK. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 77 On the Options Bar. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. text. enter 4mm Label. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Open. 75 Click OK twice. select it.rfa. In the New Project Dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. click New ➤ Project. and click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rte file. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. enter 4 for Text Size. click Modify. 7 Click OK. The titleblock graphics.rfa file. 80 On the Design Bar. select Training Files. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. 866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. under Text.70 On the Options Bar. select 4mm Label. click . select File Path. click Browse. 73 In the Name dialog box. click Sheet. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 5 In the Open dialog box. click Load. and labels are now complete. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Select the DefaultMetric. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Edit/New. click Left and Middle. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.

click . Enter In Progress for Project Status. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Name for Drawn By. 9 On the Options Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Project Information. 2005 for Project Issue Date.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. under Other. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 12 On the Settings menu. click Modify and select the titleblock. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 14 Click OK. and click OK. Enter Office Building for Project Name.

you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. 868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open. on the Settings menu. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. click Open. and set the suffix to None. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. To change the units of measurement to meters. Select c_Pantheon. click Project Units. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. set the Area to Square meters. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt. select Training and navigate to the Common folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Set the Length units to millimeters.

expand Elevations. click Set Work Plane. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and double-click South. and click OK. and click Open View. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 . 5 In the Name dialog box. click Create. and click OK. enter Dome for Name.Center.Next. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. and click OK. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. select Section: Wall Section . 7 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. select Roofs for Family Category. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. 2 In the Project Browser.

click . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. click Axis.The center wall section view is displayed. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.

and select Chain. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. click . until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 . The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.17 Move the cursor out. 19 On the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.

click Lines. select Delete Inner Segment. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 27 On the Options Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar. 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.

Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click and select Chain. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 32 On the Options Bar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 . click Lines.

The dome roof closed profile is now complete. select Concrete . The dome roof in-place family is now complete. 42 On the View toolbar. click for Material. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Family.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. click Finish Sketch. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click . Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 38 In the Materials dialog box. under Materials and Finishes.35 Select the interior face of the wall. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Create. click OK. 874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 41 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 .Center. and click Open View. and click OK. select Pick a Plane.2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. and click OK. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click . 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. select Floors for Family Category. select Section: Wall Section . 3 In the Name dialog box. click Axis. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click South. 11 On the Options Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. enter Concave Floor for Name. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. and click OK.

876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain.O. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. click . NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the axis. 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Material. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . click Finish Sketch. and click OK.O. click Revolution Properties. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click OK. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. double-click 3D Section View. select Cobblestone for Name. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 22 In the Materials dialog box. 24 On the Design Bar.18 Specify the intersection of the T.O. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. click Finish Family. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

formula-based parameters. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you will understand the process. In exercises that become increasingly complex. At the end of this tutorial. 879 . and detail level controls. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. methodology.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. The truss also has multiple types. not specifically how to make a floor truss. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. During this tutorial. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. In this case. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. assigned subcatecories.

Two types should be created. you determine the requirements of the new component. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. and structural walls. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. NOTE When creating a new family. and also works intuitively with them. In this lesson. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. In this case. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. Take this into consideration during your design planning. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. It should also be an available option within a beam system. a generic floor-based component might work. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. it is not the best solution. For training purposes. For every complexity added to a family. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. In this case. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Although this solution is possible. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In the next exercise. In addition. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. beams. you should avoid over-designing the component. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. this must be a structural beam component. it is an open-joist wood floor truss.

you determined that the component type is a structural beam. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. In the previous exercise. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. Selecting the Family Template | 881 .For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. would require Instance or Type parameters. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. such as wood type. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. 4 Continue with the next exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. Depending on the family you are designing. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. In addition.

for example: wall based or floor based. 6 In the New dialog box. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. scroll to the structural framing templates. Like most generic family templates. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. and open Metric\Templates. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). click Training Files. Select it so that the preview displays.Beams and Braces. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. In addition. On the right side of the New dialog box. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. 4 Scroll through the various template options. However. you will access them from the Training Files folder. There are two structural framing templates provided. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. notice the preview.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . ■ Metric Structural Framing .rft. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. this is where you access family templates. Usually. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it.

8 Select Metric Structural Framing . This template is the best starting point for the new family.rft to open it.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Level. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview. spacing. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). and notice the preview.Beams and Braces. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref.Complex and Trusses. Because of its simplicity.rft.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. and display functions required by structural beams. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 . it is not the best starting point for the beam family. 10 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template.Complex and Trusses.

These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Level. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Like many templates. double-click Front. lines. 884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add the reference planes. 11 In the Project Browser. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Therefore. 12 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884. Reference Plane: Left. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. double-click View 1.In this view. double-click Ref. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. under 3D Views. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. under Floor Plans. you add reference planes to the beam design. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. however. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise.

NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. In the image below. notice the location of the beam extents. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. In the project plan view image below. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 885 . ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side.

Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Before adding new reference planes. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. click Ref Plane. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. 886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. click . In a later exercise.

under Elevations. click on the Edit toolbar. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. and select the Level: Ref. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. 14 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. Level as the mirror axis. double-click Front. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. Adding Reference Planes | 887 . planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. click . The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click to place it.Add ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. Level. To do this. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. Level. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. 13 On the Design Bar.

16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. specify an Offset of 200 mm. click to place it as shown. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 19 On the Options Bar. 888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Before you move on to the next exercise. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.

click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. which you do in the next exercise. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 22 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. specify an Offset of 238 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. under Floor Plans. Adding Reference Planes | 889 . 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Level. double-click Ref.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view.

and click Save. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. Wood Floor Truss. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. 890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 27 In the Save As dialog box. After adding the dimension.rfa. navigate to the folder of your choice. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. click . By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family.25 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. This tool is the aligned dimension tool.

click Dimension. double-click Front. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891 . Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. under Elevations. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. 9 On the Design Bar.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. and the lower horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. click Modify. the Center reference plane.

You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. and place it below the dimension you added previously. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Level. 892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.

These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project.Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. dimensions. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. and constraints as needed. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893 . 15 Add four dimensions as shown. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Throughout the tutorial. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. In addition. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you will add additional reference planes. In the next exercise.

Wood Floor Truss. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. enter Chord Width for Name. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. Level. ■ Click OK. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. it becomes a parameter. 894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. 3 On the Options Bar. If the component has material that varies per component. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. Under Parameter Data. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. select Add parameter for Label. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. consider making it a type parameter. Select Type. In this exercise. consider making it an instance parameter.rfa. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. consider making it a type parameter. When you design a new family. under Floor Plans. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. double-click Ref.

6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Family parameter.Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Add parameter for Label. 7 On the Options Bar. Select Type. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. enter Depth for Name. select Add parameter for Label. under Elevations. double-click Front. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Creating New Length Parameters | 895 . select Family parameter. Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. enter Center Chase Width for Name. 10 On the Options Bar. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

16 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. select Add parameter for Label. 896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. select Chord Thickness for Label. Select Type. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. enter Chord Thickness for Name. 13 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.

In the Family Types dialog box. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. Adding or modifying a parameter. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. click Save. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. If you add a new material parameter. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you load this family into a project. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. Flexing the Component Model | 897 . You should flex the model after any major change to the design. click Family Types. Dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897. This is not limited to length parameters. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset. under Dimensions.rfa. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. Wood Floor Truss. After you verify this. Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. In this exercise. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. you can drag it to the opposing corner. and click Apply. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. click Family Types. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. 2 On the Design Bar. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you open the Family Types dialog. or ■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. Nesting a component. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. When you open the Family Types dialog box. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise.■ ■ ■ Adding a new constraint. When you flex a family. 898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter 600 mm for Depth. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. Click OK. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. In addition.Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. and click Apply. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Flexing the Component Model | 899 . reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Level.

that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. After creating the extrusions. “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. and select Lock. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. click Lines. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Name. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. you align and lock their position. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Wood Floor Truss. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Left. click Save. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. After adding the chords. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.rfa. click .When working within the Family Editor. 6 On the File menu. 5 On the Design Bar. After flexing the design. 3 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Tools toolbar. the lines will no longer overlap. click . 8 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click . click Lines. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. click . 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. Creating Solid Extrusions | 901 .Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. When using the Trim tool. and verify that Lock is selected. 10 On the Design Bar. click the part of the line you want to keep. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming.

Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 902. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. as shown. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. 4 Drag the ri